Gwconfig Oam En

User Manual

Operation, Administration and Maintenance (O.A.M.)

for

multiAccess, QUTEX, miniGateway

Version 5.1.17

2008

Software version 1.17. OAM Manual

TOPEX Page 2

TOPEX GROUP

TOPEX is a group of Romanian companies, founded in 1990, by ten enthusiastic engineers experienced in telecommunications. Its activity is directed to the research, development and production of telecom equipment as well as service.

Very quickly, TOPEX become the most important manufacturer of communications solutions for small to large companies as well as for telecommunications operators and providers in Romania. Our company designs equipment for all existing mobile systems (GSM, CDMA, UMTS), including 3G technology.

TOPEX is represented all over Romania by a wide network of local distributors through which the promotion, administration and product maintenance are running.

Due to our innovation power, authentic flexibility, real respect for our parteners and the secure solutions that we provide TOPEX extended its business worldwide. Currently TOPEX delivers its products through its distributors to: Spain, France, Nigeria, Russia, UK, Turkey, Netherlands, Greece, Bulgaria, etc.

In order to achieve effective and flawless manufacturing for its products, TOPEX has carefully organized its Research and Development Department along with its production facility.

This allows TOPEX to have maximum control of all the processes involved in the complex operations related to high-technology electronic manufacturing. Currently, 25 percent of TOPEX personnel are part of R&D Department and their number is increasing.

TOPEX also considered the training and the service as an integral part of the solutions it provides. Therefore, comprehensive training sessions are held at the TOPEX factory, complimentary for the company’s clients. Service is also provided via Internet, as all TOPEX solutions are designed especially to allow this, at the lowest cost.

TOPEX has implemented the quality management system according ISO9001 standard certified by SRAC since 1997, respectively by IQNET since 2002. In 2001 TOPEX become a sector member of I.T.U. (International Telecommunication Union).

The main lines of products of our company are:

- GSM/GPRS/UMTS interfaces (analog, E1, ISDN BRI and PRI, GSM VoIP gateway);

- Signaling converters;

- CDMA interfaces (voice/data, LAN, EV-DO gateway, GPS, miniature);

- VoIP gateways;

- Custom systems for special applications (air traffic control, railway dispatching center) or small series turn-key systems for different applications in telecommunications, developed according to the special requests of the customers;

- Phone exchanges (analog, digital, private/rural, IP PBX, protocol converters).

For more details please visit our website at www.topex.ro.

The TOPEX Group is represented by a wide network of distributors who have taken over part of the local activities of market promotion, installing and setting to work, maintenance during the warranty period and post-guarantee.

http://www.topex.ro/

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 3 TOPEX S.A.

Dear Client,

Thank you for buying the TOPEX multiAccess Gateway and congratulation for your wise choice.

By selecting multiAccess you have chosen:

High-performance services, using advanced digital technology.

Advanced diagnosis program that monitors the operation of the system in detail; remote operation possible.

Integrated and compact solution, up to 32 mobile channels or 60 VoIP channels in a single 19-inch rack-mountable cabinet 7U high. It uses a single supply powered from the 230 VA.C. Mains.

OAM application that offers integrated Graphical User Interface (GUI) and remote management to monitor all mobile channels. The user can view and monitor the status of all the mobile channels, including errors on any of the mobile channels. The monitoring can be performed locally or remotely over TCP-IP.

Greatly improved audio quality and voice clarity through direct E1 - A Law to mobile conversion.

User programmable access for dial-out. The user of the equipment can program "out-bound" calls (from GSM, CDMA or UMTS CDMA or GSM networks to the E1 trunks) to be restricted to a list of pre-programmed numbers only.

This feature provides limited access to out-going calls on dedicated channels that are reserved only for the clients with subscriptions. The selected clients may have access to “call-back” or to long-distance services through VoIP networks.

Detailed call billing by accurate answer- supervision and line- disconnect supervision based upon the selected signaling protocol (R2, R1, ISDN, SS7, H323 etc).

Improved equipment reliability. Increased integration results in higher product reliability and also in less downtime owing to the lower failure rate.

Low overall cost. The high product integration means also cost reduction compared with discrete solutions that use an E1 gateway with 30 external Fixed Wireless Terminals such as MobiLink (manufactured by TOPEX company).

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual

TOPEX S.A. Page 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 MAIN FEATURES 6 2 ABSTRACT 7 3 OPERATION, ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE (O.A.M.) 7

3.1 System requirements 8 3.2 Installing the program 8 3.3 Starting the program 12 3.4 Menu description 13 3.4.1 Systems 14 3.4.2 Facilities 16 3.4.3 About 21 3.4.4 Help21 3.4.5 Exit21 3.4.6 Common commands 21

3.5 Buttons (icons) description 22 3.6 Changes available through icons 23 3.6.1 - Save current configuration 23 3.6.2 - Upload edited configuration 23 3.6.3 - Download configuration 24 3.6.4 - Upload configuration 24 3.6.5 - Gateway parameters 24 3.6.6 - Directions names 27 3.6.7 - Calls directions 28 3.6.8 - Routing table 34 3.6.9 - LCR Table 42 3.6.10 - Restriction classes 43 3.6.11 - SIM table 44 3.6.12 - Holidays 45 3.6.13 - Callback Table 45 3.6.14 - ISUP configuration 47 3.6.15 - MTP Configuration 48 3.6.16 - VoIP Configuration 49 3.6.17 - SIP USERS 51 3.6.18 - File transfer 56 3.6.19 - Auto downloading files 57 3.6.20 - Clean HDD Space 57 3.6.21 - File Editor 57 3.6.22 - PUTTY 58 3.6.23 - Loading hour 58 3.6.24 - GSM Reprogramming 58 3.6.25 - Alerts 59 3.6.26 - Testing calls 60 3.6.27 - Halt and Reboot commands 62 3.6.28 - Configuration list 62 3.6.29 - Automatic requests 62

3.7 Arborescent structure 63 3.8 Status bar description 64 3.9 File structure 66 3.9.1 Alarm files 66 3.9.2 Billing files 68 3.9.3 SMS files 75 3.9.4 Monitoring (activity) files 78 3.9.5 ASR files 83 3.9.6 Viewer files 84 3.9.7 Log files 84 3.9.8 Changes files 84

3.10 Commands description 85 3.10.1 SMS command 85 3.10.2 Loading command 86

3.11 Statistics description 87 3.11.1 ASR statistics 87 3.11.2 Average time statistics 88 3.11.3 Calls statistics 88 3.11.4 Total seized time and connected time statistics 88

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 5 TOPEX S.A.

3.12 Password mode protection 89 3.13 Connecting to a TOPEX multiAccess system 90 3.13.1 Error messages generated by the program 92 3.13.2 Viewing and configuring the ports 93 3.13.3 Port status 94 3.13.4 Card configuration 95

3.14 Configuring the installed boards 98 3.14.1 Configuring the subscriber board – FxS card – S 98 3.14.2 Configuring the mobile modules card - G 99 3.14.3 Testing the mobile modules board 101 3.14.4 Configuring the PBX junctions board – FxO card P 103 3.14.5 Configuring the E&M board - E available for multiAccess / Qutex 104 3.14.6 Configuring the BL (Local Battery) phone board B 105 3.14.7 Configuring the radio board – RG 106 3.14.8 Configuring the ISDN - BRI board – NT or TE 108

3.15 Configuring the channels of TOPEX multiAccess 109 3.15.1 Configuring the E1R2 channels 109 3.15.2 Configuring the E1 ISDN channels 110 3.15.3 Configuring the E1 SS7 channels 111 3.15.4 Configuring the channels of VoIP cards 112

3.16 Options selected with the right mouse button 112 3.16.1 Debug 113 3.16.2 Commands 117 3.16.3 Cell Info (GSM / UMTS port) 117 3.16.4 Received Signal Level (CDMA port) 118 3.16.5 Audio Level (GSM port) 118 3.16.6 Audio Level (CDMA port) 119 3.16.7 Neighbor Cells (only for a GSM port) 119 3.16.8 Send SMS (GSM port) 120 3.16.9 Test Port (only GSM port) 121 3.16.10 Test GSM card (only GSM port) 122 3.16.11 Add / Remove cards 124

3.17 Trunk status 125 3.17.1 Trunk status of E1 card 125 3.17.2 Trunk status of VoIP card 126 3.17.3 Trunk status of E1 ISDN card 127 3.17.4 Trunk status of E1 card with SS7 settings 127

3.18 Card status 128 3.19 Monitoring the gateway operation 129 3.19.1 Status monitoring 129 3.19.2 Cell, Level and Channel info 129 3.19.3 Calls monitoring 130

4 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION BY IP 134 4.1 Access to the system (logging in) 134 4.2 „Status” option 137 4.2.1 “Port status” 137 4.2.2 “Trunk status” 137 4.2.3 “Card status” 138

4.3 Configuration 139 4.3.1 Card configuration 139 4.3.1.1 Adding a card 139 4.3.1.2 Removing a card 139

4.3.2 Port configuration 139 4.4 “Dirname” option 141 4.5 “Directions” option 141 4.6 “Routing” option 143 4.7 “LCR” option 144 4.8 “SIM” option 145 4.9 “Restrictions” option 146 4.10 “Info GSM” option 147 4.11 ”Explorer” option 147 4.12 “Logout” option 147

5 GLOSSARY 148 6 APPENDIX 1 – AT commands 150

This manual was revised for O.A.M software v. 5.1.17 - August 2008.


TOPEX S.A. Page 6

1 MAIN FEATURES Full compatibility with different types of mobile telephony networks: CDMA 450, CDMA 800, CDMA 1900,

GSM/GPRS 900/1800/1900MHz, UMTS 2100 etc;

Assures advanced automated routing with four subscriber cards per mobile channel in the basic configuration (if your network operator supports SIM or RUIM cards). The LCR (Least Cost Routing) program always chooses the least expensive route depending upon prefix, hour of the day and day of the week. Alternately, you may select the “Load balancing” algorithm to assure equal usage of each SIM;

Independent of a specific network operator (you can easily change the SIM cards or the mobile modules) - consequently highly versatile;

Compatible to most PBX and IP Gateways;

Bi-directional communication, it processes both incoming and outgoing calls on 30 channels at the same time;

Uninterrupted operation 24/24, seven days a week. Its “hot swap” feature allows you to change hardware and software components during operation. All cards except processor and power supply are hot swappable. In standard configuration, one UABxxx board (two mobile channels) is “extra” and may be used as an online replacement for a defective module;

User-friendly LED indicators on the front panel of each board notify all the important status (SIM/RUIM in use, card errors, processor and card status, alarms, etc.);

In case of alarm send out calls, SMS or e-mail messages to the administrator;

Remote connection via dial-up for serial configuration;

Detailed billing, CDR (Call Detail Records);

Advanced OAM system (Operation, Administration and maintenance) over IP, can be accessed from any Web browser. The proprietary OAM program offers extended features. It can work over IP or directly from the serial or Ethernet port of the TOPEX equipment;

Multiple signaling protocols supported: R2 / DTMF using Q411/412 or Q421/422 line signaling, R1.5 for CSI (former Soviet Union countries), SS7 with national ISUP as well as custom signaling (locals standards or for certain specialized activity domains);

For Euro ISDN networks, signaling is available with DSS1 or QSIG, Q931;

Features dedicated main the processor card, Linux OS, it is not PC based, hence is an absolutely stable system;

All maintenance functions executable while SIM / RUIM cards are in service;

Selectable CLIP or CLIR – allows or restricts the transmitting of caller ID to the called subscriber;

Compact, turnkey solution;

Fast and easy installation.

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 7 TOPEX S.A.

2 ABSTRACT TOPEX mobile Gateway can be configured using a computer connected to the equipment via serial interface

(RS232) or Ethernet port. The serial interface may be also accessed via analog modem, on a dial-up connection. Another possibility is the management interface type Web page, that can be accessed from anywhere in the world through the Internet.

By using the configuration program you may define various types of routes for the calls from the E1 trunks to the wireless networks (CDMA or GSM) or to other interfaces (VoIP gateway, local subscriber, different types of junctions, etc). Depending upon the numbering dialed one may define different routes, in a way that is completely transparent for the caller.

For instance, a number dialed towards the CDMA mobile operator can be routed only through the corresponding CDMA module, a call toward a certain GSM carrier will be routed through the mobile module that has a SIM with subscription to the respective carrier, a call to a city number local will be directed towards the PSTN, while an international call will be directed to the VoIP card, to be packaged and sent to destination via Internet.

If you wish, you may program the E1/30 Mobile Gateway for the alternative selection algorithm, called "Load Balancing". In this case the program to exchange the individual SIM or RUIM cards as to get equal usage (balanced traffic time intervals) for each of the cards.

You can also define “overflowing” directions so that a call may be processed through a back-up route to be used whenever the main route is unavailable.

In order to achieve an accurate call metering for billing of the calls, the system generates information concerning the actual phase of a call (establishing, answer, and circuit release). This is done according to the signaling protocol due to the channel connected to each mobile module, in case of calls coming through the E1 trunk. If the equipment is used without E1 card (the calls get out of the CDMA or GSM cards directly, without passing through the processor card) the indication of call start is done by line polarity reversal and disconnecting the loop signals the ending of the call. The call progress information is sent to the corresponding equipment (PBX, VoIP gateway). The billing data may be collected on the serial interface (RS232) on the main the processor card of the TOPEX multiAccess equipment. The maintenance program, used to configure the application, has also the means of taking over and processing the billing information. 3 OPERATION, ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE (O.A.M.) TOPEX E1/30 Mobile Gateway may be configured and managed in three different ways:

OAM by means of Serial port By means of the OAM program that runs on a desktop PC or a laptop connected to the equipment, either

through serial port or through Ethernet. The configuration can be performed locally (via serial cable), or remotely through the Ethernet connection;

OAM by means of Ethernet port Through Internet, accessing the IP address of the equipment via a Web browser. You may configure the IP

address of equipment as you wish in according with your network requirements and characteristics. (The initial IP address preset from the factory has been assigned only for testing performing.);

OAM by means of IP connection Direct PPP - dial-in IP connection. (Remote connection to COM21 port via dial-in). You can use an external

analog voice band telephone modem or a GSM modem in Circuit Switched Data (CSD) mode.

WARNING! AFTER YOU ACHIEVED THE FIRST CONNECTION TO THE TOPEX multiAccess SYSTEM, REPLACE IMMEDIATELY THE DEFAULT PASSWORD WITH ONE OF YOUR OWN CHOOSING!


3.1 System requirements In order to be able to configure or administrate the TOPEX E1/30 Mobile Gateway you must first install the OAM program. The installation CD-ROM that comes with the equipment includes the program for operation, administration and maintenance.

This program is a self-contained executable file that may run on any desktop PC or laptop that fulfills the following minimal requirements:

Operating system Windows 95 or later versions; Minimum processor 486; Recommended minimum 1GB free space on HDD; Minimum 64 MB RAM; CD-ROM unit; One free serial port or one Ethernet interface; Graphics resolution 1024 by 768 pixels, colors High Color (16bit) or True Color (32bit).

Through the OAM program you can configure and manage maximum 50 different TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX or 50 different EONES systems. From the same OAM application you can't operate on both kind of equipments - multiACCESS/QUTEX, EONES or multiswitch. Each of the systems has a associated directory folder (in the same place with the executable application "gwconfig.exe"). Also there are subdirectories for each types of files: for alarms - Alarms, for billing - Billing, for activity - Activity, for log files - Log and for viewing text files - Viewer. You can access all remote TOPEX systems in order to configure and maintain them. You may download files from remote systems into the appropriate subdirectory on the local HDD, or upload edited configuration files to the Topex gateways

3.2 Installing the program Perform the operations described hereunder for a proper functioning of TOPEX multiAccess:

Insert the installation CD in your CD-ROM unit; The program features auto run, it should begin installation by itself; Install the OAM program achieving the instructions that are described on your display.

The installation screen shows up: the Topex logo, the name of the program being installed and the equipment for which the program is intended.

TOPEX S.A. Page 8

TOPEX multiAccess You just wait for the OAM program to be installed on your computer.

Then the Welcome screen appears, mentioning which version of the program is currently installing. The actual software version may be different from the one shown in "Welcome" window, so after finishing installation, you should use "About" command to see the OAM version currently running on your computer.

Then the window "Choose Destination Location" appears, asking you to specify the folder where the "gwconfig" application will be installed. The default value is a folder named "TOPEX" in the "Program Files" system folder. Select "Next" to continue or "Browse" if you want to specify another folder for the installation. Usually, you do not need to change the default location.

The "Select Program Folder" window comes next. Here you must specify the name of the Programs folder were the startup icon for the OAM will be installed. The setup program will create in Programs a folder called "TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM". Again, you should not change this default value.

Page 9 TOPEX S.A.


Now the effective installation begins, you will see a progress bar showing the progress of the installation:

When the setup is successfully ended, the window "Setup Complete" will show up. It asks you if you want to see the README file and if you want to launch the OAM program immediately.

TOPEX S.A. Page 10

TOPEX multiAccess

To end the installation, click the button "Finish".

Now the OAM program is fully installed on your system. To launch it, go to the Start menu, select "Programs" and then click "TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM".

Note 1: If the "autorun" feature for CD's is not enabled on your computer, then you must launch the Setup program manually. Go to "My Computer" and click on your CD drive. You will see the contents of the Topex installation disk. Double click the "Setup" icon to launch the installation program.

Note 2: You may want to remove the OAM program from your computer. - From the Start menu, go to "Settings" and select "Control Panel".

- From Control Panel, double click the icon "Add or Remove Programs". Search in the list of currently installed program the application "Topex Gateway - OAM" and click the "Change/Remove" button if you want to uninstall the program.

A window called "Confirm File Deletion" shows up, asking you to confirm that you want to remove the OAM program. Press YES to continue. Now the un-installation of the program begins. You will see on screen a progress indicator.

The OAM program is removed from your computer, but the TOPEX folder won't be deleted. Consequently, if you had configuration, billing or monitoring files in this folder, the files will be kept. Also, when you re-install the OAM program over a previous installation, the configuration and log files won't be overwritten, so you may keep your settings, activity and billing records.

Note 3: On Topex CD-ROM there is also a folder named "OAM". It contains all files which are necessary for the OAM application to run in case that you need to copy them manually to a folder you want to use.

Note 4: If you have checked the box "I like to launch TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM" or when you go to "Start - Programs- TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM", the OAM program will start up.

Page 11 TOPEX S.A.


3.3 Starting the program Now the OAM program is fully installed on your system. To launch it, go to the Start menu, select "Programs" and then click "TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM". You can also start the program from the command line: Start => Run => Command => change folders to the TOPEX directory => type “gwconfig.exe”. This mode of launching the program has the advantage that you may use several options (command line parameters).

Options for the OAM program

In order to allow additional facilities, the “gwconfig.exe” application may also be started at the command line prompt with the following parameters: 1) “-D” The OAM software includes a protection against starting more than one instance of it. If it is necessary to start the software more than one time, you should use the following command to start the application: "gwconfig.exe -d" or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several TOPEX gateways. 2) "-C" The parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administration program to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a space delimiter and these three fields: identification name for the remote system, user name and password (to allow automated log-in). For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>". 3) "-S" Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of data. The information saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, live monitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S" All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

When the program starts, a screen called “TOPEX GATEWAY version x.y.z – Operations, Administration and Maintenance” window.

TOPEX S.A. Page 12

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 13 TOPEX S.A.

You will notice:

First, a menu bar, with names such as Systems, Facilities, About, Help, Exit; Underneath it, a toolbar with different buttons marked with icons; To the left, the tree-like structure of connected gateways; The right panel, blue, which is the main window, showing the cards and ports of the system; In the upper right corner, the flags for selecting the language.

These elements of the O.A.M. program will be detailed in the following pages.

3.4 Menu description

Systems Through the OAM program you can configure and manage maximum 50 different TOPEX gateways (E1/30 Mobile systems).

Add Adds a TOPEX system in the tree like structure Removes Deletes a system from the tree like structure Facilities

Font Chooses the font type for the text in the “Modify configuration” and "View configuration" windows

Color significance

Shows the significance of colors used in "Modify Configuration" and "View Configuration" windows in the representation of cards and ports. The user is allowed to modify the colors at his choice.

View print files

Opens a window in which you may see the text files into which other text files have been printed using the icon button “Print” (or the icon “Print”)

Commands Opens a window through which expert users may enter direct commands to the system

License Opens a window where is inserted the license activation code About Shows the software version. Help Opens up the window with the searchable help files for the program Exit Exit from the OAM program.

Now each command (option) from the OAM program menu will be explained with illustrations.


3.4.1 Systems The Systems menu contains two options: Add and Remove SYSTEMS => ADD Add a new TOPEX system to the structure. When you click the “Add” command, the window “Add system on position n” is displayed.

In the “Add system on position n” window you must specify:

Directory – enter a name for the folder where the files downloaded from the TOPEX multiAccess system will be stored. On the computer hard disk it will be made a directory in the following shape "cfg_xxxxxxx" where xxxxxxx is the name typed in the "Directory" field. The folder will be created on hard disk in the directory where the executable 'gwconfig.exe' is located. In the picture above, the directory name is “GSM”.

Name – enter a name for the connection to the system. It will be concatenated with "cfg_" and show up in the tree-like structure as “cfg_GSM”. These concatenated names are text used from now on in the tree structure for identifying the system.

Serial communication / IP communication – here you specify the type of link between OAM computer and E1/30 Mobile gateway.

There are two exclusive options for the communication with TOPEX equipment: IP or serial link.

A) IP Parameters - if you choose IP communication, you must fill the next two fields:

IP address - enter the IP address of the system. It can be a numeric IP address or a text address (in that case a DNS request will be made by software).

IP Port num. - enter the number of the port through which the communication with the system is achieved. The default value is 9009. This value is also established into the gateway system and should not be changed.

Dial-Up Connection field

- In case of IP communication, if this box is checked it allows you to establish a dial-up connection. The Dial-up connection must be created from Windows (from Control Panel "Dial-Up Networking") and the connection name must not contain the space character inside the text.

- Option “Use PPP address” is used to indicate to the “gwconfig” application that it must connect to the address of the dialup server, after a successful connection. If this option is NOT checked, then the “Gwconfig” program will try to connect to the address specified in the field “IP address” field.

-

TOPEX S.A. Page 14

TOPEX multiAccess

Note: On the TOPEX multiAccess system there is a configuration file that specifies the IP addresses, so the IP address to connect may be deferent from the one specified above. If the option “Use PPP address” is checked, upon achieving DialUp connection the TOPEX system automatically connects to the IP address from the dial-up server. - If the parameter “DialUp Connection” is checked you may choose a dial-up connection from the list at "DialUp

connection name". You must enter a "DialUp Number" which overrides the number used at the creation of the Dialup Connection.

Also by pressing "Edit" button you can override the "User" and "Password" used in the process of authentication.

You must note that if you make changes to "User" or "Password" fields, those changes are made also in the Windows registry.

The field "Connection Timeout" is the time in seconds wait from the moment of starting the DialUp connection and the obtaining the connection state. B) Serial Communication - if you choose the serial communication connection must describe the following fields:

Serial Port num - enter the number of serial port used in case of serial communication with the gateway. The default value is COM1. This value must be in range COM1-COM12.

Note: There is a limit for the length of the text: maximum 19 characters for the fields "Directory" and "Name" fields and maximum two characters for the field "Serial Port num".

Save - saves the setting and adds in the tree structure a system with the modified settings;

Cancel - closes the window without saving the settings;

Help – opens the Help window which contains the electronic manual.

SYSTEMS => REMOVE If you want to remove an existing TOPEX system, select “Systems > Remove” option. The next window will appear.

To remove a TOPEX multiAccess system from the structure, select it and then click on 'Save' button: the selected system will be deleted from the tree structure; the folder (directory) on your hard disk drive won't be deleted, you must erase it manually. If you select Cancel the window will be closed. Note: There is also a tree command for changing systems parameters: Name, communication type, IP Address, IP port number, DialUp parameters and serial port number.

Page 15 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual 3.4.2 Facilities

FACILITIES => FONT

If you select this option, the following window will appear. In this window you can select according to your preferences the font, the font stile and the size of characters. The changes will affect only the windows called: View Configuration and Modify Configuration.

FACILITIES => COLORS SIGNIFICATION Here you may see or modify the color scheme used by the OAM program. This facility describes (and lets you change) the significance of the colors used in the windows "View Configuration" and "Modify Configuration", as explained next: - dark blue for a free (available) position; - red for a position in alarm; - white for a position already used (busy); - light blue for a position not installed (free slot); - colors for the text; - colors for the background (the same colors for text and background will

be used also for the dialog windows; - colors for the tree-like structure.

All these colors can be modified according to user’s preferences by clicking on it. The "Default" button is used to restore color settings to the original color set.

GSM Info – The text column at the right of "Colors signification" window explains the meaning of values shown for a GSM port in alarm.

When a user selects the icon "Status monitoring" in a connected state, additional information will be provided for GSM ports. If the GSM module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) then after the port position and a line character a value is shown, describing the cause of the error.

Example of a GSM port in alarm, displayed in red color. Here the type of error is "2" - "no physical SIM"

Possible error causes are: 0 - module in initialization phase (programming); 1 - no mobile network available ("AT+CREG?" phase); 2 - no physical SIM present; 3 - no logical SIM. You may get this value in the following situations:

- when the "SIM index" rule is used for changing the SIM cards for the mobile module. “No logical SIM” means that for the current time moment no SIM value is specified in the SIM index; - If "LOAD BALANCING" algorithm is selected to change the SIM on the mobile module. “No logical SIM” means "Load Sim" value (the usage time of the SIM) is over the SIM maximum time to use ("Max");

4 - mobile module error - the module is not responding to "AT" commands; 5 - the mobile module is requesting PUK code.

TOPEX S.A. Page 16

TOPEX multiAccess

FACILITIES => VIEW PRINT FILES

In this window you can view the text files into which another files or information have been printed by means of the “Print” icon button. To see a file, select its name from the list and click the button “View”. A window for viewing / editing the file now appears. In this window you can perform searches by using the buttons marked “FIND” and “NEXT” or you can use the “Print” button to send to the printer a listing of the file.

FACILITIES => COMMAND Use this option for entering direct commands for the system. This part of the OAM program is "expert level only". You may resize or move the window "Configuration manager” on the screen as you wish. The position of window and dimensions will be saved in a file on HDD in order to be preserved for future use.

Log Section for “COMMAND” option - if you check this option, a log file will be generated. This file allows you to analyze later the commands sent to the gateway and the responses from the gateway. The log file is always named "command.txt". The option "Reset" is used to reinitialize the file used for saving the log. The commands to be issued to the TOPEX gateway are filled in "OAM" edit field, at the top of the window. A command is sent to the gateway after pressing the <ENTER> key.

The command window is useful for several purposes: - Direct conversation with a mobile module – you can send them AT commands; - Set PIN codes, display the number of calls, to configure the algorithms for SIM selection, etc. - Start or stop the debug process; - Display the statistics over the number of calls; - Kill a current call on a port; - Block or unblock a SS7 channel; - Loop or unloop SS7 channel. “Loop”-ing means that the "Tx" and "Rx" are looped together. This way, the caller can

verify the continuity of the circuit, by sending out a certain tone on Tx and getting back the same tone on Rx; - Reset a SS7 channel.

Page 17 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 18

AT Commands for “COMMAND” option - if you want the mobile module to accept AT commands you must first put it in the monitoring mode. The respective mobile module must belong to an UAB (CDMA or GSM board) that is installed. So the first command in a series of AT commands will always be "set moni xxx", where "xxx" is the number of the respective CDMA or GSM port (as it appears on the "gwconfig" panel). The TOPEX gateway must send back the confirmation message "moni xxx", where 'xxx' is the position of the respective mobile port. When the CDMA or GSM port couldn't be placed into a monitoring state the following warning message is received: "res moni". If you receive this message (in the section "Exchange response zone") then you must type first "res moni' and after that "set moni xxx". After you receive the confirmation from the gateway, you can send to the mobile modules of the gateway AT commands.

Some of these AT commands are described in the table in Appendix 1. To get a mobile module out of the monitoring state, you must issue the command "res moni". Setting commands for “COMMAND” option - there are also additional commands that are interpreted by the application running on the TOPEX gateway. To see the listing of all available commands you must issue the command "help":

set pin sim sss pppp Used to set the pin codes for GSM modules at module "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set pin range sss sss pppp Used to set the pin codes for GSM modules in range "sss" to "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set/res moni ppp used to put / extract a GSM port from monitoring state send gsm at....... Used to dial a number

set debug ppp ppp Used to start debugging on a port. The port for debugging purposes is completed in "ppp" section: for example to activate debug for port 1 the command is "set debug 1 2"

set view ppp Must be sent to port "ppp" after the command "start debug ppp ppp" in order to activate the debugging facility

res debug ppp ppp Used to stop debugging on port "ppp". The port is completed in "ppp" section: to stop the debugging for port "1" the command is "res debug 1 2"

res view ppp Must be sent to port "ppp" after the command "res debug ppp ppp" in order to deactivate the debugging facility

set tmax sss sss ttt

Allows you to define a time interval ('ttt') after which a SIM will be blocked. “sss” is the sim coresponding value. You may specify a range of SIM cards values. Value of 'sss' may be computed as follows: number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + number of sim (0,1,2 or 3) for the first GSM module or number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + 4 + number of sim (0,1,2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

set calls

It is used for displaying the total number of call attempts ("TCalls"), answered calls ("T spech"), total duration of calls ("Dcalls"), total duration of speaking ("Dspech) and the number of calls released from "A" side ("Arelease") and from "B" side ("Brelease")

set calls off This command is used to reset the previous values

set block ppp ppp Command used to send block message on SS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res block ppp ppp Command used to send unblock message on SS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

set loop ppp ppp Command used to send loop message on SS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res loop ppp ppp Command used to send unloop message on SS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

kill call port This command disconnects an active call on a GSM module. The position of the GSM module is specified by the "port" parameter

test callbqack id This command is used for making tests over the quality of voice. In this chapter this command is detailed presented

Load balancing for “COMMAND” option The following commands are used for settings concerning the second SIM selection algorithm, called LOAD BALANCING. If you select the "equal load" mode of work for the algorithm, each SIM on a GSM module will be used for a certain period of speaking time, and then the system will go to select the next SIM card with the lowest load. The commands are: "set tchange 1800/3600" - speaking time period in seconds following which the active SIM is changed (the gateway looks for the SIM card with the lowest load for the same GSM module). Usual values are 1800 or 3600 seconds. This parameter is the same for all GSM modules and can be viewed and changed in any GSM settings window. "set tsim sss ttt" - allows setting the time counter (loading time): 'sss' is the SIM corresponding value and 'ttt' is the value in seconds. Value of 'sss' may be computed as follows: number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + number of SIM (0, 1, 2 or 3) for the first GSM module or number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + 4 + number of SIM (0, 1, 2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 19 TOPEX S.A.

Execute AT commands In "Configuration manager" window the user is also able to execute AT commands on all mobile modules. The execution of these commands is based on a script file which is given as command parameter. This file must be placed in the same folder with "gwconfig" application. In this file the user can enter a batch of AT commands to be executed over the GSM modules. The file must include the AT commands you want to be to be executed over the GSM modules, the expected response, the time delay to wait the appropriate response and the the option to save the responses into a file. The command to start this process is "execute -f xxxxx.txt" for all GSM modules (where "xxxxx.txt" is the script file), or "execute -f xxxxx.txt -d GSM" to start the process just for the modules belonging to the "GSM" direction. AT commands are read from the "xxxxx.txt" file. A window called "AT Commands Confirmation" is displayed for monitoring the process.

In order to clarify this facility, here is shown a commented example of a script file: at+gsn OK 10 1 at+cimi OK 10 1

Each command is grouped as four lines:

1. AT command to be sent to mobile modules; (in the example above these commands are "at+gsn" for IMEI code and "at+cimi" for IMSI code).

2. Response wanted for the AT command; (in both cases the expected response is OK; the expected value is included in responses before the "OK" text).

3. Time to wait for the expected response; the next field is a value (0, 1 or 2) that has two meanings: the first significance (for a value of 0 or 1) is the time delay to wait for the response at an AT command. If the response comes in the specified interval then the process continues immediately. The second significance, if the value read from the file is 2, is this: the application waits all the specified delay and the last message received from the mobile module is saved into a file.

4. An option about the saving of the response into a file; a 0 value means no savings are done into a file, while a value 1 means responses will be saved in "atresp.txt" file. If the value for the option is 2 then the last message received during the waiting time will be saved in "atresp.txt". The option value of 2 can be used to verify the credit for prepaid SIM cards.

Notes: - Before sending any AT commands the application starts the monitoring process (the same as selecting "Status

monitoring"). This is done because the application needs to know which cards are in alarm, which ports are in alarm or in a call.

- This interrogation is performed just for the SIM cards currently registered. Because AT commands can't be sent to mobile modules that are in conversation or in alarm, those modules will be skipped in the process. When the current interrogation for a module has reached the last port, then the process will be restarted for the skipped modules. The total number of restart cycles is 5 (five).

- After a new interrogation process is started (after an "execute" command is performed) the file "atresp.txt" will be deleted.


Here you have a commented example of “atresp” file:

The first column represents the port position. The second column displays the current "Status" of executing AT commands over the respective mobile port. Possible values are:

- WAITING - AT commands are not yet sent to the port; (light blue color background)

- FINISHED - AT commands have been successfully sent to the port; (dark blue background)

- CONNECTED – the port was found in a call at the time when it was supposed to be placed under the process of executing AT commands; (red background). The port will be interrogated in the next cycle.

- PORT ERROR- the port was found in alarm at the time when it was supposed to be placed under the process of executing AT commands; (red background). The port will be interrogated in the next cycle.

- TIMEOUT- there was a timeout for receiving responses for an AT command; (red background). The port will be interrogated in the next cycle

- CARD ERROR- the card to which the port belongs was in alarm when the application was tried to execute AT commands for that port; (red background). This port will NOT be interrogated in the next cycle.

- UNINSTALLED - the port is not placed on any direction or the INST category is not given; (gray background). The uninstalled port will NOT be interrogated in the next cycle.

-The third (leftmost) column shows the number of interrogation cycles: 0, 1 … The maximum number of restart cycles is 2 (five).

Voice Quality Tests In the same "Configuration manager" window the user can to perform tests over the quality of voice on two mobile modules. In order to make those tests, the user must first define the ports on which he wants to make the tests.

This selection is done in the "Callback Table": <identity (number) to test quality of voice> 1 <code 1> <code 2> The first field of the line is an arbitrary number used to start the test of the quality of voice. The second field must be "1" (callback functionality). The last two fields are containing the prefix used in routing table, the GSM port number and the number to call. <code1>=<prefix>+032+0744000001 (GSM port position - 032, number to call -0744000001 ) <code2>=<prefix>+033+0744000002 (GSM port position - 033, number to call -0744000002 )

The Topex gateway will call the mobile module on first port, and following its answer, it will connect the two, allowing you to check the quality of voice for the respective connection.

For example: 9999 1 720320720000000 720330740000000 - the identity used for test is "9999". The prefix used in routing table for the test service is "72". First GSM port is 32 and the second is 33. First number to be called is "0720000000" and the second one is "0740000000".

In routing table must exist a record to route "72" (the test prefix) to SERV ("Action" = SERV) and destination "11". The command to start the voice test is performed from "Configuration manager": test callbqack 9999 When the last command is executed, the gateway calls the first number 0720000000 from port 32. When the call is answered at destination, the second part of the test is done. The phone number 0740000000 is dialed and the two are connected.

This way you can connect two by two all of the GSM ports of the gateway and test the quality of the voice on the respective connections.

TOPEX S.A. Page 20

TOPEX multiAccess

Linux commands Finally, in the "Configuration manager" window you can also type LINUX-like commands that will be sent to the connected gateway. The command must always begin with the string of characters "system" s.

A LINUX command may follow, after a separator (a space character). If you type the ">" character following a command the software automatically adds the destination file for the command output. This destination is by default "/mnt/app/out/out". After issuing such a command, the user may analyze the output file by selecting the "Output File" icon command (" ") from the toolbar.

FACILITIES => LICENSE This last option of “Facilities” menu is used to send a license message to the TOPEX multiAccess gateway. The purpose of the "license" feature is to implement control over the time-limited application running on the gateway. This limited application will serve incoming calls only for a specific number of days. After the expiration of this period, the application will no longer process the calls. A license message is sent by TOPEX company, message that is unique for each gateway (it can't be used with another gateway).

The application licenses can enable the control over some of the features of the multiAccess gateway. The available features are: - Basic; - SS7; - VoIP; - Callback; - Portability; - Tax - Pulses calculation.

The license-enabling message consists of several lines. This message can be received by the customer as an e-mail message. The user copies the message into the "License" window and it send to the gateway.

The gateway should answer with the confirmation message: "LICENSE ACCEPTED". If the license message is not valid, the answer will be "LICENSE REJECTED". If the license is accepted then the number of working day is displayed in the status bar.

3.4.3 About

If you select "About" the adjacent window will appear in order to tell you what version of application software you have installed on your computer.

For example “4.1”. Also you will see the TOPEX logo. Select the “OK” button to close this window.

3.4.4 Help

If you select the “Help” option the searchable help file (in English) will be displayed.

3.4.5 Exit

If you select “Exit” the confirmation window shows up. Select “OK” if you really want to exit the OAM program or select “Cancel” if you want to continue with the program.

3.4.6 Common commands Help – pops up a help window specific to the “Add system” command (this operation manual in electronic format). In the help window you may read the description of all the options. Save – saves the setting, it adds in the tree-like structure a system with the settings you have entered or changed. Cancel – closes the window without saving the settings. Print - the “Print” icon, located in the upper right corner of every window of the OAM program, prints the image of the respective window. This way you can get immediately a hard copy of the current configuration of the window - a single click of the mouse is enough!

Page 21 TOPEX S.A.


3.5 Buttons (icons) description

The toolbar with button icons is located under the menu bar. Some buttons are equivalent to options from the Menu or the System screens. This button toolbar is a dynamic bar, which changes aspect according to certain actions performed by the user. The OAM software may be in one of these three states: 1. One TOPEX system connected, all option icons are available

2. Files for a system, the following icons are available 3. None of the above situations (no system connected) The following table explains the icons from the button bar:

Icon Label Description Add system Equivalent to System > Add Remove system Equivalent to System > Eliminate Saves current configuration Save Current Configuration of remote TOPEX system Upload edited configuration Upload edited configuration to remote TOPEX system

Download configuration For TOPEX equipments with redundancy - with two processor cards

Upload Configuration For TOPEX equipments with redundancy - with two processor cards

Gateway Parameters Define gateway parameters Directions names Defines names of directions (trunk groups) Calls directions Defines classes of directions for the incoming and outgoing calls Routing table Defines table for the routing of the call LCR table Defines LCR table Restriction classes Defines the classes for restrictions to the calls SIM table Defines the table with indexes for usage of SIM / RUIM cards Holidays Defines the table with holidays Callback Table Defines callback table ISUP Configuration Defines circuit groups for SS7 configuration MTP Configuration Defines signaling points (SP) for SS7 configuration VoIP Configuration Defines parameters for the Voice over IP card

SIP Users Defines SIP USERS settings Displays a window that allows file transfer from the TOPEX system to the OAM program File transfer

Automatically transfers files from the system to the OAM computer (depending upon predefined criteria) Auto downloading files

Clean HDD space Deletes old/unnecessary files on the HDD to create more space

File editor Editor for the configuration files, allows you to change the settings Used to see the content of the file from the gateway, where LINUX commands output has been redirected. Downloads the output of a previous LINUX-like command that has been sent to the TOPEX system.

Output file

In a state of connection between "gwconfig" program and a gateway, launches directly the "putty" application. Putty will connect on port 22 to the same IP address to which "gwconfig" software is connected. The username will be sent automatically (it is taken from the name used for logging into the TOPEX gateway).

Putty

Sets time; uploads the time/date from the computer where the OAM program is running to the TOPEX system Loading hour

GSM Reset Performs reset (reprogramming) of all mobile modules Alerting Defines parameters for alerting Test calls Defines and programs test calls Halt command Command for stopping the TOPEX system Reboot command Command for REBOOT-ing (restarting) the TOPEX system Status monitoring Starts/Stops the interrogation of the system about its current status GSM Info Monitoring for Cell, Level and Channel Info of mobile modules

Monitoring of ongoing calls, online display of current calls; also a start/stop pushbutton Calls monitoring

Configuration list Display a visualization window for the settings of all ports Starts the automatic interrogation procedure of all installed system for finding the alarms or ASR ("Answer Seizure Ratio") values Automatic requests

Info Equivalent to “About” from the menu Help Equivalent to “Help” from the menu Exit Equivalent to “Exit” from the menu Print Prints files, either to printer or in a text file Find Searches for a text string in the files

TOPEX S.A. Page 22

TOPEX multiAccess Next Looks for the next location of the text string that is searched Password mode Starts / stops working in “password” mode Define users Allows definition of users for the software "gwconfig" Start connection trace Starts protocol message monitoring (survey of the file traffic) Stop connection trace Ends monitoring of protocol messages

Note: There are two additional icons used in a particular situation when TOPEX equipment is supplied with 2 processor cards (one active and one backup) - this can be the case of redundancy for Soft Switch or EONES boxes.

Download configuration files from one of the selected processor cards.

Upload configuration files in selected processor card. This operation can be also performed in the same time on both selected processors.

3.6 Changes available through icons

3.6.1 - Save current configuration A configuration is the collection of files which are downloaded from a gateway during the connection progress. These files describe the mode of working for a TOPEX gateway. The "Save Current Configuration" (icon " ") may be use only in a state of connection between the "gwconfig" application and a gateway. The adjacent image is displayed allowing the user to type the "Configuration Name".

Click the "Save" button in order to validate the name. Then, a new item will appear in the tree window located in the left side of the application panel. The name typed in the "Enter Configuration Name" will be shown beginning with the characters "viz". This means the configuration can be saved and edited on the local computer, even without connection to a remote TOPEX gateway.

Note: “viz” shows the configuration on the local computer. The gateways to which the user is able to make connections will show up with characters "cfg" before the gateway identification name. This means the configurations are in directories for the remote gateways to which you connect.

There are two possible options for a saved configuration: - "Edit" - this option will display the saved configuration in the same manner as for a connected gateway. The user is able to make changes. All settings are preserved when the user choose the "Close" option. - "Close" - this is the option to close the "Edit" configuration mode.

The program will show a confirmation message: "Do you wish to hide last configuration?".

Click the “OK” button to confirm.

3.6.2 - Upload edited configuration This option is used in a state of connection between the "gwconfig" OAM application and a remote TOPEX multiAccess gateway.

press the icon " " and launch the uploading process; select "Uploading Configurations" and the configuration you want to be uploaded;

All available configurations are displayed in a list.

select a configuration from the list, then press the button "Loading".

When the uploading process is ended, a confirmation message is displayed:

The "gwconfig" software will display on the screen the new configuration. This configuration is used also by the main application running on the TOPEX gateway.

Page 23 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.3 - Download configuration This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or Soft Switch equipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor card from which the configuration is downloading:

The configuration is downloaded from the selected processor card.

When the configuration is downloaded - the next window appears asking for taking over the new configuration. If the answer is yes - then the configuration will be displayed in the OAM panel.

3.6.4 - Upload configuration This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or Softswitch equipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor/processor cars to which the configuration will be uploaded:

Once the processor card is selected the uploading process is started.

The confirmation message for successfully uploaded is "The new configuration has been uploaded!". If an error occurs the message will be "Uploading configuration Failed".

3.6.5 - Gateway parameters The "Gateway Parameters" icon can be used for editing several gateway parameters of the TOPEX equipment. These parameters are regarding IP address, firewall, serial connectivity and IP connectivity with "gwconfig" software, debug, syslog and SNMP messages to be generated by Topex gateway. When you click on the “ ” icon, the following window will appear.

The gateway parameters are grouped into six big areas:

Network settings;

Connection zone;

Firewall settings;

Debug;

Billing;

Syslog;

SNMP.

TOPEX S.A. Page 24

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 25 TOPEX S.A.

A. Network settings – this area allows you to change network settings for the TOPEX multiAccess gateway:

IP address of the gateway (the most important parameter) – in the image the record started by “IP ADDR”; Netmask (line that starts with "NETMASK"); Gateway address (line started by "GATEWAY").

After you change after one parameter from the "Network settings" the gateway must be restarted in order to use the new value of the parameter. The icon command to be used for restarting the gateway is " ".

B. Connection zone - these settings are related to the serial connectivity and IP connectivity of the TOPEX equipment with the "gwconfig" software. The command "Parameters" located in the "gwconfig" software is related to the PC communication parameters. The parameters set for the gateway must correspond to those established for the OAM program.

Now you can set parameters for the TOPEX multiAccess system. Of course, the parameters set for the gateway must correspond to those established for the OAM program. The available settings are:

Serial Speed - the value used for serial communication between OAM program running on the PC and the software of the gateway. Allowed values are 0 (it means unused port and must be set when you want to is intended to install a dialup server on the gateway), 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (default value);

Serial Port num – specifies the number of the serial port on the gateway to be used for serial connection with OAM computer. Allowed values are 1 or 2 and the default is 1 (COM1);

IP Port num – the port used for IP connectivity; the default value is 9009. If this value is changed from OAM software, then the connection will be immediately lost. You must have the same port number established both in the OAM program and in the software running on the TOPEX gateway. After performing a reset, the OAM software will be able to connect to the gateway using the new value of IP Port.

C. Firewall settings - in this edit zone - user can add incoming firewall rules.

Each line from the edit zone must contain three fields: first field is the connection type ("tcp" or "udp"); next the IP address follows - it represents the IP address from which the connection to the port specified in the

third field is allowed; third field represents the port on which the connection is accepted.

For example "tcp 192.168.1.6 22" means that a TCP connection is accepted on port 22 (SSH port) from "192.168.1.6" address. To enable firewall protection you must uncomment some lines of the configuration file. For this, remove the "#" character from the beginning of these lines: "LAN=ppp0", "WAN=eth0", “USE_FIREWALL=yes".

After this operation is done, you must reboot the gateway for the new settings to take effect.

Warning! Be careful when you use the embedded firewall. If the firewall protection is started without the presence of valid lines in the "Firewall settings", then the Topex gateway will be no longer reachable from IP. In that case, the only solution for accessing the gateway is to use the serial connection via the COM2 port of the PG card. Use this serial connection to fix the firewall settings, and then you will be able again to access the gateway via IP.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual D. Debug - activates several options for generating special log files, useful for debug (diagnosing and repair) operations.

Activate 'log' file - when the option is checked the debug messages will be generated in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. These debug files have extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy);

db_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages will be shown in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. A log file is created if it was enabled from the "Alerts" icon " " of the toolbar. Those debug file have the extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy);

db_cfg - when the option is checked any changes on gateway configuration will be shown in the gateway debug log;

Debug Mask - The option sets the debug mask (four bytes) that establishes for which subjects will be generated debug logs.

The items that may be recorded in the logs are: "Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM". To edit the "Debug Mask" field, the button "..." must be pressed. Then the "Computing Debug Options" window will be displayed.

Here you just check the boxes for the options you need to generate debug information.

"Port Activity" - generate debug records for all ports of the TOPEX multiAccess; "ComCCS" - generate debug file for the application that manages communication on ISDN and SS7 networks. (Both signaling protocols use Common Channel Signaling, that is a dedicated, non-associated channel especially reserved for signaling); "SOmes" - debug the main application running on the gateway; "comUNIX" - debug the commands that are received from the Web server (using an Unix socket); "comOAM" is used to debug the communication with OAM program.

E. Billing – This section contains two fields which are activated by checking the box near the fields:

- Add IP fields – if it is checked, the application will automatically add the necessary IP fields (for instance the signaling IP field);

- Output in MYSQL database – if it is checked, thus option determines the output of gateway billing files in a MySQL database installed on a different server.

F. Syslog – if you activate this option (by checking the “Activate” box), the debug messages are sent to a selected IP address. This Syslog is an UNIX-like feature that allows logging of debug messages and sending them to a remote machine;

The destination IP address is written on target in the file "/etc/syslog.conf". All logged messages will contain the identification of TOPEX gateway (you enter this identification in the field "Equipment ID").

"Facility" list allows you to select the type of syslog messages. You may choose: "LOG_USER", "LOG_LOCAL0", "LOG_LOCAL1", "LOG_LOCAL2", "LOG_LOCAL3", "LOG_LOCAL4", "LOG_LOCAL5", "LOG_LOCAL6" and "LOG_LOCAL7";

syslog_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages are sent to the syslog destination;

syslog_cfg - when the option is checked then any changes made upon gateway configuration will be also sent to the syslog destination;

Syslog mask – similar to Debug mask, this option establishes about what items ("Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM") will be generated syslogs. Click on the “…” button and the next window shows up, allowing you to select the items which will be included in the syslog.

G. SNMP - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") alarms can be sent as traps to a selected IP address ("IP destination").

The user can choose the type of the trap (default value is 6 - "Entreprise Specific"), the community name (default value is "public"). For an alarm appearance - the value sent is 0, and for an alarm disappearance is 1. You can allow that together with the trap containing the 0 / 1 value, a second trap with the alarm text specification to be sent. The OID of traps are derived from the specified OID ("1.3.6.1.4.1.x")

Name - this field is used as a prefix for the names of different files (alarm, billing, activity, log and ASR) created by the gateway's application. If you leave this field empty, then the name of these files is given by the current day and an extension (for example "12-01-05.tax" is the billing file created on the 12th January 2005). If the "Name" field is filled then the names of these files will be given by the name you have typed, concatenated with the current day and the extension. For example if you type "Topex", the billing file created on 12-01-05 will be named "Topex12-01-05.tax".

TOPEX S.A. Page 26

TOPEX multiAccess Samples of messages from a debug log of a TOPEX gateway:

If option "db_alarms" was set then messages preceded by "RUN" will appear in the debug file: RUN Com Err cd f cat 43 (this is an alarm message on card 'f' which is card number 15 from the gateway) RUN Com Err cd 10 cat 4003 (this is an alarm message on card '10' which is card number 16 from the gateway) RUN NLIS 4 (LIS error on card 32) RUN NLFA 4 (LFA error on card 32) RUN NAIS 4 (AIS error on card 32) RUN NRJA 4 (RJA error on card 32)

If option "db_cfg" was set then messages preceeded by "CFG" will appear in the debug file: CFG Open for read ../cfg/trafic.cfg CFG Alarm run 0 ASRalarm 80 timeasr 12(min) nr min calls 1 alarmmask 0 timetest 0 CFG Save ASR at 30 min CFG Debug 1 Pstart 0 Pstop 320 SaveFile 1 CFG Trafic run 0 CFG Trafic idle time 5 CFG Trafic seize time 30 CFG GEN TRAFFIC CALL 0 1234567891108 120 port 257 mod 0. These messages contain operations performed over the configuration files.

If the "Port Activity" option is validated in the creation of debug file then messages starting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file: 00257 7235150 pid 1 E1CCSidle ACTIV channel 1 00257 7235150 Digits 1234567891108 Ident 120 00257 7235200 Route N 123456 ... NT 123456 ... RxT 9000 00257 7235200 Dialdig M_CALL len 30 00258 7235200 pid 2 E1CCSidle CALL mod 1 mycat 540f b_pid 1 prtb 101 param 0 00258 7235200 Digits Ident 120 00257 7235250 Dialdig ACK_CALL->Dialdest 00257 7250250 Dialdest TimeOut 00258 7250250 E1CCSackout TimeOut|CANCEL ->BUSY.

In this case messages were generated for ports 257 and 258.

If option "SOmes" was validated in the creation of debug mask then messages starting with "GEN" will appear in the debug file: GEN COADA 6 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0 GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:19:10 SysDay 2 GEN Run60sec 6872131 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease 1,Brelease 0 GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:20:11 SysDay 2 GEN Run60sec 6465996 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease 1,Brelease 0 GEN COADA 5 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0

Finally, if you select option "comOAM" in the debug mask creation then the debug file will also conclude messages starting with "OAM": OAM ADD CARD 16 CAT 4003 (this is a message showing that the card 16 was added to the gateway by means of the OAM program. Value "4003" is a category which describes the type of card.)

3.6.6 - Directions names Routing of calls is based upon rules and directions (trunk groups). First, you define (or edit) the names of these “directions” and then you use “Define call directions” icon command to change the table with directions for call.

Press icon for selecting the "Direction names’ option and performing changes into the list of names of directions.

On the screen will appear the window „Define direction names” which contains the list with the directions defined on the gateway (the maximum length of directions name is 19 characters).

Depending of the gateway main application there is a maximum of 20 or 250 directions. These “Directions” are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have common routing characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you must assign one or more trunks to each direction. Edit a name of direction - select the name of the direction you want

and double click the name. The next window, “Edit direction name", pops up, allowing you to change the name of the selected direction.

For instance: change “ISDN” direction into “ISDN5”. The name of each direction must be a unique identifier - an alphanumeric text (digits and letters) maximum 19 characters long. If you type more characters, they will be ignored. The first character of the name must not be a digit. In addition, the text that you enter for a direction name must NOT contain spaces (blanks). Otherwise, an error message will be displayed. The names provide an indication for the type/usage for that direction, such as: E1R2 – E1 trunk with R2 signaling, ISND – for the ISDN PRI trunk, SENDSMS – used for sending out short text messages, CDMA1 or GSM2 – for one or another of the mobile carriers, JONDIRn – direction for junctions (outgoing trunks), LOCAL or LOCDIRn – for local subscribers, VOIP – for voice over IP and so on.

Page 27 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.7 - Calls directions

Click on the icon button "Calls direction" (" ") to open up the window for defining the table with call directions. There is a maximum of 20 or 250 directions (trunk groups).

In the bottom are of this window - there are two buttons named "DIR IP In Settings...” and "DIR IP Out Settings". The first one is used to control the incoming access into the TOPEX equipment. The second one is used to establish the VoIP outgoing destinations.

edit parameters of a direction - double click on its name and the window "Edit call directions parameters" will show up:

The parameters of a direction are:

Name - the name of the direction (cannot be edited here); Type - can be PORT or DIR and specifies how that direction is addressed. The associated list contains two strings

"PORT"=local and "DIR"=junction (trunk). A value of "255" indicates that the direction is ignored; when the "255" value is assigned to a direction - then the entire line will be colored in white color. The name of the direction which has "255" assigned to "Type" field will be displayed in red color in the list used to assign a direction for each kind of port and also in all places in which the destination will be a direction name.

Overflow -overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this overflow direction (SIPREG in the image above) when the current direction is unavailable (completely busy or out of service); you choose a name of a defined direction from the corresponding list;

Overflow 2 - second overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this second overflow direction when the first overflow direction becomes unavailable; you choose a name of a defined direction from the corresponding list;

Restriction - the class of restriction applied to that direction; from the list a number from 0 to 19 can be selected; Ignore - specifies how many digits are ignored from the numbers received on that direction; the first x digits of the

received number will be ignored. The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits; Insert - specifies what digits will be inserted in the number received to that direction. The maximum allowed is 16

digits. If you don't want any digit to be inserted you must enter “---” for this field. Note: First the ignoring operation is performed and then the insertion operation.

TOPEX S.A. Page 28

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 29 TOPEX S.A.

Max_d - maximum number of digits that may be dialed on that direction. When the maximum number is reached

the system will automatically send out the call to routing analysis, without waiting to see if the caller part still sends digits. This option is especially useful when you define directions for which the number of figures to be dialed is well known (for example the numbers for certain GSM networks). The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits;

Ignore_id - Ignores from the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number of digits you have specified; The maximum allowed is 20 figures. The Ignore command is performed before the Insert command. The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits;

Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID the specified figures; The maximum allowed is 16 digits; Max_id - The maximum number of digits from the Caller ID to be sent to the subscriber who has been called. The

list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits. Note: For calls coming from E1 trunk and going out via mobile modules, the true identity of the caller cannot be sent (some GSM networks don’t allow this). The called party will receive only the ID of the CDMA module or the SIM card from the TOPEX equipment that was used to route the call. In case of calls that come from the GSM network, the true Caller ID can be sent to the called party via the E1 trunk. Signaling - contains 4 digits in the 'xyzw' format with the following significance:

Digits Purpose

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x1000) DIRCHECKCALLBACK - when this bit is set then for an incoming call on this direction the callback table will be analyzed with the received identity (caller identity)

bit 3 (mask 0x8000) DIRMODULECDMA - when this bit is set all GSM ports placed on the selected direction will be treated as CDMA modules

y (digit 2)


bit 0 (mask 0x0100) DIRTESTNET (used in case of a direction which contains GSM modules) - when this bit is 1 one then the outgoing GSM module will be tested if it is registered

bit 1 (mask 0x0200)

DIRGOODASR - when this bit is set then a RELEASE message is sent on ISDN with a delay of 5 seconds when a congestion situation is encountered on GSM part. The call will wait on the specified time a free GSM resource.

bit 2 (mask 0x0400)

DIRCATCALL - when this bit is set then all calls will be cut (stopped) on the GSM modules for which a reprogramming is necessary (for example when a SIM must be changed because of an used algorithm)

bit 3 (mask 0x0800) Verify CLIR - when this bit is set then the CLIR setting is verified each time after the CLIR setting is sent to a GSM module

z (digit 3) audio level (in range 0-7 dBm for the directions with GSM interfaces) where '0' is the biggest level value and '7' the lowest value

w (digit 4)


bit 0 (mask 0x0001) Receive identity - when is set identity is received on selected direction

bit 1 (mask 0x0002) Send Identity - when is set identity is sent on selected direction

bit 2 (mask 0x0004)

Load Balancing Algorithm - establish the algorithm for changing SIM on GSM interfaces (when not set, the algorithm for minimal cost is used (SIM selection by time periods). When the bit is set, the "load balancing algorithm" is used (equal usage time for each SIM)

bit 3 (mask 0x0008) Coupling the ring-back tone - by setting it, you allow coupling of ring-back tone while dialing on the next link, before the called party answers


You can either input the individual values for the digits of “Signaling” or use a simpler means, to press the button "..." located left of the “Signaling” field.

In this case a window called “Computing Signaling Field” shows up, assuring you an easy way of setting up the "Signaling" bits for you. You just check the items you want and the program computes and inserts for you the individual bits.

Signaling 2 - contains eight (8) digits that will be fully used in further developments.

"Transit Q.850" - is used to transfer the Q.850 termination code from the GSM link back on the E1-ISDN link. Those Q.850 codes are available only for the Siemens mobile modules.

For Voxson modules and when the "Transit Q.850" option is not checked the main application sends a congestion message in case of NO DIALTONE message and for a NO CARRIER received in under two seconds (since the beginning of the call in the mobile network). The BUSY message is also received from GSM network and is sent as it is. A NO CARRIER message received for a delay value greater than two seconds will be treated as a release from the GSM network.

"Load balancing algorithm on SIM index" - is used to enable the load-balancing algorithm ("equal load") on the SIM/RUIM cards that are already selected by SIM index algorithm. "Calculate Tax Pulses" - for each direction (group of trunks) for incoming calls, you can establish the computing (and sending out) of the tax (billing) pulses. These pulses for billing will be generated according to rules you specify and will accumulate in the billing files. In any case, the calculated billing pulses are saved in the files. In the case of an ISDN connection (E1-ISDN trunk) these pulses are also sent out, using ISDN - AOC messages. You must remember that the mask must be applied to the direction to which the E1-ISDN channels belong.

Note: You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in “Routing Table”.

The "Search UP" and "Search Down" fields are used for establish a rule in which channels are selected - for example for a SS7 E1 trunk - the order in which channels are selected in very important - if the trunk is used in both direction then one side will choose channels from the first one - and the other side from the last one.

The "Priority" field is useful in order to implement rutes with the same prefix to have different priorities. For example - when a TOPEX Soft Switch is used to route calls to several TOPEX gateways - then each outgoing direction will have assigned a priority. The customer can assign higher priority to the machines with higher traffic capabilities and performances. The lowest priority is 0 and the higher is 9.

Verifications are performed for the fields that are involving insertion operation: "Insert" and "Insert_id". The allowed characters are digits from 0 to 9, "*", "#", "f" and "F". In case of incorrect values, an error message will be displayed. Finally, press “OK” button and validate the settings for the Signaling field if your settings are correct. Note: If the field "Signaling" for a direction (for a record with type "DIR" ) is changed by modifying “Receive identity”, “Send identity” or “Audio Level”, then all the mobile modules belonging to that direction will be re-programmed. This is required in order to properly activate the sending and the receiving of the identity (Caller ID). In addition, the audio level will be re-programmed for all mobile modules of that direction. A confirmation message will be displayed.

TOPEX S.A. Page 30

TOPEX multiAccess

At the bottom of the „Define calls directions” page are located two buttons „DIR IP In Settings...” and „DIR IP Out Settings...” which allows the definition of the input and output directions for the GSM Gateway.

a) DIRIPIN section - this section is used to perform direction settings for VoIP incoming calls.

By clicking the "DIR IP In Settings..." button in "Define calls direction" window the following configuration window will show up:

You can Add or remove (Del) records about incoming VoIP calls. Note: In this field the user must allocate to each pair <protocol, IP range> a direction and a maximum number of incoming calls. The name of the direction can be one of the already defined directions, so it can be “MYVOIP” - the generic direction used for group the VoIP channels or another direction if you want to use ignore / insert features. If you use the generic MYVOIP name, all VoIp calls will be treated in the same way, but if you use speciffic direction names, you can define different rules for different incoming IPs. This allows you to perform operations such ignoring / inserting digits on the incoming number or identity (see "Calls direction") like for ordinary calls.

To edit the parameters of the input directions double-click the respective direction name and on the screen will appear the „Edit incoming parameters” page which contains the following fields:

- Protocol – the protocol used for the respective direction. You can select SIP or H.323.

- IP – the IP range for the incoming direction. Here you can complete either a single IP (such as 192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"). The maximum number of incoming calls is set to "1". If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just from that IP. It is the same as using range /32;

- Direction – the direction name. It is chosen from the list with defined directions;

- Max Calls In – the maximum number of calls which can be receipted on a single direction. In the anterior example the maximum number of calls is 100. If you enter 0 (zero) in the field “Max Calls In”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number of incoming calls.

Page 31 TOPEX S.A.


Examples: SIP 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for SIP protocol calls are allowed from all IPs, and maximum 60 calls are allowed H323 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for H323 protocol also calls are allowed from all Ips, and maximum 60 calls are allowed

Note1: in the "IP field" you can complete either a single IP (such as 192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just from that IP. It is the same as using range /32. For example: if you use 192.168.1.0/24 then IPs allowed are 192.168.1.x; if you use 192.168.0.0/16 then IPs allowed are 192.168.x.x; if you use 192.0.0.0/8 then IPs allowed are 192.x.x.x; if you use 0.0.0.0/0 then IPs allowed are x.x.x.x (calls are allowed from all IPs!);

Note2: The maximum number of incoming calls controls the number of simultaneously calls accepted from the specified IP. If you enter 0 (zero) in the field “Max Calls”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number of incoming calls. The equipment will accept any number of calls. The default value is 100.

Proxy - must be enabled if the source IP is behind a NAT. Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination have different codecs. This feature works only on the equipments supplied with a VoIP card (or there is a TOPEX slave machine with VoIP card). Congrate - this is the congestion rate. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000. Maxrate - this parameter represents the total number of setup calls on a second. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000. Prefix - this parameter was added in case when calls are coming with different prefixes from the same IP source. In case of two such prefixes - the user can assign two different directions for the same IP source. Maxcost - this parameter will be used in further developments. Nrdig - with this parameter - you can control the number of expected digits for each call coming from the specified IP. Endcause - this field is the release code used when the received number has a different number of digits then the expected ones - "NrDig" value. The default value is 34.

b) DIRIPOUT section - this section is used to perform settings for outgoing VoIP calls.

TOPEX S.A. Page 32

TOPEX multiAccess

Here the software application features a possibility to allow “overflow” over an IP direction.

The user defines for each direction name: a protocol (SIP or H323),

a destination IP,

a port used for signaling for example 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP),

the maximum number of outgoing calls.

In order to route a call on VoIP to a destination IP address - there are two possibilities of setting in "Routing Table": - if you use "DIRIP" in "action" field then you can provide a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323) but just one IP. - if you use "DIR" in "action" field then you can provide a direction name (you don't have any VoIP channel assign to that direction - because all VoIP channels are assigned to "MYVOIP" direction). Here in "DIR IP OUT" section you'll make the relation to an IP address and a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323). - RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT. - Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination has different codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance the destination IP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding; - Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. This parameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition ("Define calls direction");

To edit the output directions features press double click on the direction name and set the parameters from the „Edit outgoing parameters”.

Direction – select the direction from the list with defined directions names;

Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. This parameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition ("Define Calls Direction");

Protocol – the protocol used for the respective direction;

IP – the IP range for the incoming direction. Here you can complete either a single IP (such as 192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); The maximum number of incoming calls is set to "1". If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just from that IP. It is the same as using range /32;

Port – the port number related to the selected direction;

Max Calls Out – maximum numbers of calls on the output direction;

RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT;

Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination has different codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance if the destination IP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding.

Page 33 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.8 - Routing table Defining the table with rules for routing of the calls.

Press on the icon “Routing table” ( ) to open the window with the routing table. You can define maximum 128 of routing rules (there are also situations in which the TOPEX machine can handle more routing records such 1024 or 4000 records). The user can consult the current settings of the TOPEX machine regarding the number of directions and routing records in the licence window);

Use the buttons of the right sight of window for performing the following operations: add a routing rule to the table, insert a new record, edit a routing rule, and delete a rule for routing.

Add – add a routing rule to the table. A new record will be added at the bottom of the list (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field); Insert – insert a new record over the selected record from the table (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field); Del - delete a rule for routing. First select it from the list and then click the "Del" button (the deleted line will have an empty "Prefix" field); You can have the same prefix more then once - case in which you can use "Move" buttons to change the prefix order - for the same prefix - the upper line will have a greater priority than the lower one.

Note: For several fields the length is limited: for “Prefix”, “Insert” and “Insert_Id” maximum 16 digits are allowed, for “IP” the maximum is 15 characters and for fields “Signaling”, “Tax” and “Port” 4 digits is the maximum.

To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

Incoming direction – this parameter is used in case of using several routing records with the same prefix in order to make the difference between incoming sources. It has to be interpreted here as incoming source direction. A "DEFAULT" value means that there is not rule to be applied.

Prefix – the first digits of numbering, which are needed for routing the call (for example to direct all the calls to a mobile telephony network on a certain route enter the prefix 0722 or 0723 or 0788). If you leave empty this field the respective routing rule will NOT be taken into account at saving action; Inside a prefix string, the value “f” can be used to indicate any digits from zero to nine (0-9). For example, “1f2”

means al prefixes from 102, 112, and so on until 192. This feature is very useful because it allows you to reduce the number of records in the routing table.

TOPEX S.A. Page 34

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 35 TOPEX S.A.

Action - specifies the action to be taken for the call. It is a list of six strings: “PORT”, “DIR”, “SERV”, “HUNT”, “DIRIP” and “LCR”. PORT - the call will get out through the port specified in the "Destination" list; DIR - the call will get out by the direction you have specified in the "Destination" list; SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the "Destination" list; HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that you have specified in the "Destination" list; DIRIP - in such a case the "Dest" field will be interpreted as VoIP protocol - SIP or H323. The user must provide

destinations IP address and port (in case when the default values of 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP are not used); LCR - the call will get out by analyzing the LCR table for the index specified in the "Destination" field. This field can

take a value from 0 to 6. Each value represents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specified moment.

Destination – the destination, which may be: A port number (in the range 0-127); A direction name specified in “Define directions names” (from the list); A service number (from 0 to 19); A number for a group of hunting (from 0 to 19); An index to the LCR table.

Ignore – the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the numbering sent out through “Destination”. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;

Insert – option complementary to “Ignore”. Adds to the number sent out through “Destination” the digits specified; the maximum allowed is 16 digits.

Ignore_Id – the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sent out through “Destination”. There is a list with values from 0 to 20; Insert_id – option complementary to “Ignore_Id”. Adds the specified digits to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest', in this example 30; the maximum allowed is 16 digits. IP – used when “DIRIP” is used to fill the “Action” field. It is the remote IP address used to establish voice over IP

connection;

Port - the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when "DIRIP" is specified in the action field.

Note 1: For calls coming from E1 trunks and going out via mobile modules, the true identity of the caller cannot be sent (many mobile networks do not allow this). The called party will receive only the ID of the CDMA module or the SIM/RUIM card from the TOPEX equipment that was used to route the call. In case of calls that come from the mobile (CDMA or GSM) network, the true Caller ID can be sent to the called party via the E1 trunk. Note 2: The Insert and Ignore operations for the phone number and Caller ID are processed first in the “Directions IN” and then in the “Routing Table” steps. The “Directions OUT” does no longer perform ignoring or adding of digits to the phone numbers.

Signaling – four hexadecimal digits of the type “xyzw”, explained in the following table:

Digits

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Meaning

bit 3 (mask 0x8000)

Alloc BSS - used when the ring-back tone must be properly identified in order to declare the call as answered. This option is useful in cases when the gateway application must differentiate between a call answered without ring-back tone and a call answered following a ring-back tone. For instance, you may want to avoid billing a voice mail box! To use Alloc BSS feature, you must install additional software on the Topex multi-Access gateway.

bit 1 (mask 2000)

Simulate Tax - is used in case of FXO junction - in which the answer at destination can't be recognized. In such a situation this option has to be validated. The call is considered as answered as soon as the call is made on output link.

bit 0 (mask 0x1000)

Retry Attempt - when this bit is 1, in case of a first failure on this direction, one retry attempt will be made; when this bit is 0 no retry attempts will be made

y (digit 2)

First bit is zero by default it. It may be one (1) if you need to specify more than 15 digits for numbering (see specification for digit z)

Check Operator (mask 0x0800) - is used when the portability facility is required. Number portability means that for each call routed (with check operator) on the route you have specified, a database interrogation is performed for checking the destination number. The portability database can be located on the same gateway or on another PC. From this database the corresponding operator for the phone number is found. Depending upon this operator, the database returns a new prefix, to be used for routing the call to the right operator. In order to use the portability feature, you must also install additional software on the multi-Access gateway.

Restrict ID (mask 0x0400) - is used for SS7 direction in order to indicate that the identity is restricted. The identity can be hidden if in routing record - the ignore identity field is put to maximum digit allowed - 20.


Number of Digits - Establishes the number of digits that are waited for before taking the action specified in the field "Action". If you set it for example 14, only the first 14 digits will be taken into account out of the numbering received or dialed, the additional digits will be ignored. The digit 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). If you require larger number of digits, you must use also the previous digit, 'y'. Fro instance, if you want to specify a number of 16 digits, you must enter a group of 'yz' with the value “10”.

z (digit 3)

w digit 4) Number of Seconds - Sets the number of seconds during which the Topex equipment waits for the numbering to be received or to take the action specified in the field "Action". For instance, if you set the digit “w” to 3, multiAccess will wait for three seconds between one digit dialed and the following digits.

Note: Value of 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). When a bigger number of digits is required, the value of 'y' may be used. A group of 'yz' with values '10' means 16 digits.

By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Signaling" field will appear:

you may fill the individual bits for Signaling or instead you can click the button "..." and a window for automated setting of "Signaling" field will show up like this:

You just enter the values you want for the options and then click OK to confirm the new settings. The program performs validations upon some values - the field called "Number of Seconds" can be filled with values from 0 to 15 and the field "Number of Digits" with values from 0 to 20. If you type a bad value into one of the fields, an error message will be shown.

Note 1: If you have selected the action “SERV” and the service number is “4”, the incoming call will get a flashing tone. This is used for testing purposes (verifying the connection of multiAccess gateway to other equipment).

Note 2: There is a situation when the "Computing Signaling Field" window will look different. When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Destination" field is "FLASHING", the window will look like in the next image:

In this case, the “Signaling” field will specify actions concerning the flashing tone given to the incoming call:

Connect To Music - the TOPEX gateway provides to the incoming call a flashing tone (the normal greeting music of the system);

Connect To DSP - the welcoming tone will be obtained from a DSP (Digital Signal Processing) circuit (with possible values from 0 to 63);

Loop - the "Tx" and "Rx" are looped together. This way, the caller can verify the continuity of the circuit, by sending out a certain tone on Tx and getting back the same tone on Rx;

Quiet - no tonality will be provided to the incoming call; the user will not hear anything. The “Quiet” option in used for performing measurements;

The "Timer" field is used to specify the duration of the greeting tone, as follows: if a "0" value is used then the tone will be heard forever otherwise the “Timer” value will set the interval of time (in seconds) during which the selected tone will be played to the incoming call.

TOPEX S.A. Page 36

TOPEX multiAccess

When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "PLAY_RELEASE", the window will look like in the next image:

The release cause for the prefix specified in routing table with action = "SERV" and destination = "PLAY_RELEASE" will be released with the cause specified in "Release Cause". A message to be played on such a situation can be also recorded and stored on the TOPEX equipment.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=SELECT PORT" is used for testing the quality of voice through the two GSM modules from the gateway (as explained in "Facilities-Commands" chapter).

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=DISA" is used for DISA operation on ISDN channels. For example a record could be:

"Prefix = 8" "Action = SERV" "Destination = DISA" "Ignore =1" "Signaling = 0000"

The meaning of this record is: calls are coming from ISDN with the prefix (first digit) '8'. This digit is deleted (because the value in the field "Ignore" is 1). DISA tone is provided. All those new digits, which are collected in DTMF tone, will be analyzed according to the routing table. If you want to be sure that all the digits from the original number are deleted you can use instead "Ignore = 20".

If you want to force the call to be outputted only on a GSM direction, you can have in the list starting with '8' the "Insert" field filled with the first digit of a mobile call. For example "Insert = 0". Then, in the record for prefix "0" in the routing table you must set "Ignore =1" so one digit is deleted.

Note: for a GSM port, DISA tone is provided from the GSM port by selecting the appropriate setting in the "Category" zone.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=HUNTING" is used for hunting in case of SIP users. There is a setting in SIP user's window definition regarding the membership into a hunting group (a value from 1 to 50). An incoming call routed on SERV and HUNTING will ring to all SIP users belonging to the same hunting group. You can define a timeout for this action. Those two fields are stored in Sign3 field and can be edited through the "..." button.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest="LOGIN_QUEUE","LOGOUT_QUEUE" and "SERV_QUEUE" are used for routing the call to a queue (for a call center implementation with SIP users operators). An operator has to access the queue to a call routed to LOGIN_QUEUE. The number of the queue is set in Sign3 and can be edited through the "..." button. The number of a queue can take values from 0 to 50. When the operator is leaving the office, he has to "LOGOUT" from the QUEUE with a call routed to "SERV" and "LOGOUT_QUEUE" and the number of queue with the same value as for "LOGIN_QUEUE" record. All calls routed to "SERV_QUEUE" with the same number of queue will be accessed by the operator or operators already attached to the same queue.

Tax – type of billing. You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in “Routing Table”. To can handle charging issues you must change the field “Tax”.

Prefix Action Dest. IP Port Ign Ins Ign_id Ins_id Signaling Tax

0 DIR GSM 0 0 0 00a4 110a

There are three methods (rules) for configuring calculation of tax pulse. The first digit (the leftmost of the four) of “Tax” field is used to differentiate between those methods. Allowed values for the method are: 0 – no method, 1 – method 1, 2 – method 2 and 3 – method 3.

Page 37 TOPEX S.A.


Method 1

“1xyy” – upon answering the call is charged with “x” pulses. During the state of conversation the call is charged with one pulse every “yy” seconds. So if you select “1” you must specify the number of pulses at response (10 in the next image) and the time period for pulse generation (20 seconds in the adjacent example).

Method 2

“200x” – the calls are charged according to several zones and tariffs. The zones are geographical areas where the tariff is the same. This kind of taxation is performed by several fixed telephony (PSTN) operators. If you select Method 2 you may change only the “Tariff Index” value.

The list of all zones and tariffs is defined in the next window, “Pulse calculation based on Zones” that is displayed by pressing “…” button.

You can easily handle zones and tariffs. A maximum number of ten zones and four tariffs can be defined. In the adjacent image you can notice the tariff allocation on each day of the week. First, you have the day-tariff assignment. “day=>1,0” means that the tariff 0 is applied on each “Monday”. The days of the week are allocated beginning with Monday – 1 up to Sunday – 7. There is also an 8th day of the week, the holidays the first value is 8. These special days that begin with 8 are defined in “Define Holidays” After day – tariff allocation the tariff – zone correspondence follows: each line starts with a triplet “tariff=x,yy,zz”, where “x” is

the number of the tariff and “yy-zz” is the time interval when the settings that follow are applied;

after the characters “tariff=x,yy,zz” come the ten columns, the zones showing time period when a pulse is generated. The temporization values are in msec, so if a value is “60000” this means 60 seconds

Method 3

“ 3xxx” – the calls are charged according with a tariff. This is an extension (refinement) of Method1. Besides the number of pulses upon answering and the period for generating pulses, now you can specify also a period without tax pulses and the number of pulses per taxing period. This kind of billing is used by several mobile telephony carriers. If you select method 3, you may change only the “Tariff Index” value. There are maximum 10 tariffs, so values for “Tariff Index” can be value from 0 to 9.

The list of all tariffs is defined in the window “Pulse Calculation based on Tariffs”, which is displayed by pressing the button “…”.

In the adjacent picture, “Tariff1” is defined as follows: - one pulse is sent upon answering - then follows a one minute pause, for 60 seconds no pulses are sent - after 60 seconds one pulse is sent every 10 seconds.

TOPEX S.A. Page 38

TOPEX multiAccess

In the “Tax” field, there is also a facility for limiting the maximum duration of a call limit. For this, you select “4” for the value of the field “Method”. This is NOT really a method for calculating the charge for a call!

With this, you may impose a time limit for the call. The value for “Time” is in minutes, so the example above means that no calls longer that one hour will be allowed.

SecondSign - here the user can specify in case of a SS7 route some translations parameters as follows:

The first zone is related to "Nature of Address" information. We offer the possibility to override the "Called Party" nature of address and "Calling Party" nature of address.

The "Called Party" nature of address is changed by enabling the first to options "Check Called Party NAI" and "Override Called Party NAI".

The original "Called Party NAI" - Subscriber,Unknown,National,International and UK Specific - can be changed to "Override Called Party NAI" which contains the same list as the first one.

Moreover the "Calling Party NAI" can be override by selecting a value from "Override Calling Party NAI" and enabling the "Override Calling Party NAI" option.

The second zone named "Type of Media Required" - the route will be available just for the specified type of media.

Possible values are "speech", "64k_unrestr" and "3K1Hz_audio". The "Translation Occured" is to indicate for SS7 that a translation of number has occured

Ctime - this parameter establish the maximum call duration (in minutes). Is similar to "Tax" method 4. If this value is set here (not 0) the "Tax" method 4 will be ignored.

Search Mode - this parameter is used for routing in case of using routes with the same prefix. In such a case a method for overflowing and dividing the traffic between several routes must be provided. Each route from such a group must have "Retry Atempt" option in "Signaling field" (0x1000).

Overflow is performed if one of the following situations occurs:

- When the call is routed on VoIP - the main application is checking if number of simultaneously calls is greater then the maximum number of output calls established in diripout settings (see DIRIPOUT section);

- When the call is dropped from the remote side with a release cause which is set for rerouting in "trafic.cfg". For example to reroute on congestion message the line "rerouteoncause 34 1" must be added in "trafic.cfg". We assume this premise in the following explanations. This parameter is used in conjunction with "Search Param" parameters:

Page 39 TOPEX S.A.


Search Mode Search Param Significance

ASR Not used The route will be chosen based on ASR value

ACD Not used The route will be chosen based on ACD value

The call will be routed based on direction priority (direction specified in "dest" field). Calls from the routing group (with the same prefix) will go mostly on the direction with the highest priority. If the maximum number of calls is reached (for example for a direction specified in "DIR IP OUT" settings when "Max Calls Out" value is passed

Priority Not used

The route will be chosen from the first to the last one. Depending on the position in routing table the first route from the group will have the highest priority.

Down Not used

The route will be chosen from the last to the first one. Depending on the position in routing table the last route from the group will have the highest priority.

Up Not used

Circular Not used The route will be chosen circularly. Calls will be routed based on percentage. The "Search Parameters" represents in this case the percentage value. The application running on TOPEX machine knows the number of calls on each machine.

Percent Specifies the percent

Sign1 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign2 - is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" can be override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” is displayed by pressing the “…” button.

Sign3 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign4- is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" can be override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” is displayed by pressing the “…” button

TOPEX S.A. Page 40

TOPEX multiAccess

To override the incoming category - the "Check IN Category" and "Override IN Category" must be selected. In the "IN Catgory" list - you select the incoming category which will be replaced with "Override IN Category". The possible values are: "unknown" "op_french" "op_english" "op_german" "op_russian" "op_spain" "op_rsrv1" "op_rsrv2" "op_rsrv3" "notused" "ord_subscr" "prio_subscr" "data_call" "test_call" "payphone" "uk_oper_call" "uk_admin_diverted"

Sign5 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. Sign6 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. The next parameters are used to establish when the routing records are valid: "StartTime", "EndTime" and "Dows". The first two parameters represent the time period when the record is valid (calls can be routed based on the selected record). The "Dows" field is used to set the days of the week when the record is valid.

The "Billing Profile" field will be used in further development.

Page 41 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.9 - LCR Table

Press the icon (" ") for the "LCR index table" defining. In this table there are displayed the 8 indexes of LCR rules. Each index includes information about the selected direction, for specified time intervals on each day of the week and about the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days).

Edit a certain LCR index, double click on that index and the next window will be displayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, the information is displayed by default for "Monday".

For each day of the week, a list shows up with the time periods (intervals) that specify the direction to be used. In the image above, for 00:00 until 24:00 the direction "LOCAL" will be used. The periods are structured as hours and minutes separated by character ":". When the user modifies the selection in the list, the fields which are located at the bottom of the window are filled with the line information: period "From" to "Until" and the current direction. These values can be modify and validate by option "Mod". If you select the “Add" option, a new line will be added in the list. The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list. The periods are checked before adding or modifying operation. An error message is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values used are wrong (hours or minutes). The “From” field has the value 0020, without “:”. The field in error is shown with red, and the error message is “Bad value for field From”.

Note: The lines that are containing "255" instead of a declared name direction are not saved in the "LCR" file. The format of the "LCR" file is compacted in order to have a smaller size. An example of LCR file content is as follows: #---LCR INDEX FILE--- #Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80 #s index_lcr day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min dir(%x) l 00 1 00:00 24:00 0 l 00 1e 00:00 24:00 1 l 00 20 00:00 00:01 f l 00 20 00:01 12:01 11 l 00 20 12:01 14:01 13 l 00 20 14:01 23:01 a l 00 20 23:01 24:01 9 l 07 13 00:00 24:00 1 l 07 4 00:00 11:45 1 l 07 4 11:45 12:23 8 l 07 4 12:23 12:31 1 l 07 4 12:31 18:50 8

Each line is containing a letter 'l', a LCR index number (for example 00 and 07), a mask (each day of the week has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and finally an index to specify the direction used. This is the index in the "Directions Names" table (a value from 0 to 19).

Note: if the same periods and the same direction are used on different days (but for the same LCR index) then instead of two records in the file will be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operation between those days. For example "1e" is used to identify Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

TOPEX S.A. Page 42

TOPEX multiAccess

3.6.10 - Restriction classes press the “Restriction Classes” icon (" ") for defining certain classes of restrictions for the calls. On the

screen will appear the “Restriction classes” window which contains the restrictions for every defined direction.

double click on the class line for editing or modifying the restriction of a class.

Using the window that appears for inserting the restriction. There are 20 restrictions for each class.

Rules for establishing restrictions:

each restriction has 8 characters. The characters can be any figure or the letters 'a' or 'f': - 'a' represents the figure 0 (zero). For instance a subscriber with the restriction aa000000 won't be able to make calls started with digits "00" (international phone calls). - 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restriction f0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to call any number - it will be able only to receive phone calls. - '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there are eight "0" figures this means that no restriction has been defined for that field.

a class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a class we have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal value corresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all the restrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will be added the restrictions defined in the current class.

Page 43 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.11 - SIM table

press the SIM icon (" ") and the window “SIM card index table” will appear. This is a table where the four indexes of SIM cards are displayed (00, 01, 02, 03). Each index includes information about the SIM card selected for each hour interval of each day of the week and even the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days).

To edit a SIM index, double click on the respective index and the “Table modification for SIM xx” window will be displayed on the screen.

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, by default the information is displayed for "Monday".

In the list are displayed the periods (intervals) that specify the SIM/RUIM card (1, 2, 3 or 4) to be used. The time periods are structured in hours and minutes separated by the colon character ":".

When the user changes the selection in the list, the fields which are located at the bottom of the window are automatically filled with the line information: period "From" to "Until" and the active SIM card. These values can be modified and validated by option "Mod". If user selects "Add" option a new line will be added in the list. The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifying operation. An error message is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values used are wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of an active SIM card are not saved in the "simindex" file. The format of the "simindex" file is compacted in order to have a smaller size.

An example of simindex file content is as follows:

#---SIM INDEX FILE--- #Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80 #s index_sim day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min sim(%x) #---HOLYDAYS--- #h holydayday holydaymon s 00 1f 00:00 06:00 2 s 00 17 06:00 20:00 0 s 00 1f 20:00 21:30 3 s 00 1f 21:30 24:00 0 s 00 8 06:00 20:00 1 s 00 60 00:00 24:00 0 s 00 80 00:00 12:00 0 s 00 80 12:00 24:00 1 s 01 ff 00:00 06:00 0 s 01 ff 06:00 12:00 1 s 01 ff 12:00 18:00 2 s 01 ff 18:00 24:00 3 s 02 ff 00:00 24:00 1 s 03 ff 00:00 24:00 0 h 01 01 h 01 01 h 25 12 h 08 01

Each line that specifies a SIM index begins with the letter 's', then follows a SIM index number (00, 01, 02 and 03), a mask (each week day has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and a SIM card value. In the file the active SIM card is written from 0 to 3. In all locations in the "gwconfig" software values from 1 to 4 are used for SIM cards (on GSM holders values 1,2,3 and 4 are shown).

Note: if the same time periods and the same active SIM card is used on different days (for the same SIM index) then instead of two records in the file will be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operation between those days. For example "1f" is used to identify Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

Note: the records starting with 'h' character are used for holidays definition.

TOPEX S.A. Page 44

TOPEX multiAccess

3.6.12 - Holidays

Press the icon button (" ") - to define the non-working days with special mobile tariff. This is needed if your mobile network operator has special (lower) tariffs on Sunday or national holydays.

The windows named “Define Holidays” will show up. This window shows a default list with the national holidays and you can edit the list, add or remove non-working dates with special tariff.

Click the ”Add” button for adding a holiday in the list. Once a record has been added you have to double click on it in order to be able to edit it.

To delete a holiday from the list, select the date from the list and click the "Del" button.

To edit or modify these data double click them and on the screen will appear the „Edit holidays data” window which contains two fields, Day and Month, where are inserted the new holiday data.

3.6.13 - Callback Table Press the icon (" ") for defining the table with callback subscribers and their access rights and the "Callback table" window will appear:

Callback services assure lower costs for the mobile subscribers: from a mobile phone you just call the Topex gateway and hang up. The software checks identity on incoming calls and if the telephone numbers are in its database calls them back. You don't have to pay anything for the connection! This is very useful for mobile users in the field that have prepaid cards, which feature an expensive tariff. They can ring the Topex gateway located at headquarters, and the equipment will call them back, put them into connection with other mobile subscriber or allow them to send e-mail messages via SMS.

Callback table is containing the following fields: "Identity", "Action", "Callback", "CallTo", "MailTo", "ClientClass", "NewClientClass" and "NewClientID".

Callback has several implementations (depending on the "Action" field which can take the values "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and "DISA"):

if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" and the field action contains the mask "CALLBACK" then the caller party will be called back. The back call is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number, then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" and the field action contains the mask "CALLBACKONSMS" then the caller party will be called back. The callback is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" and the field action contains the mask "SMSTOMAIL" then the text content of the SMS will be sent to the IP address which is specified in the field "MailTo";

if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" and the field action contains the mask "DISA" then a "DISA" tone will be provided to the caller part; The subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is called back and receives DISA tone (if the field "CallTo" does not contain another phone number). "Direct Inward Services Access' allows the mobile subscriber to get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

Page 45 TOPEX S.A.


The next three fields named "ClientClass","NewClientClass" and "NewClientID were added in the latest versions. It allows to change the incoming direction from the current one to a new different direction; based on such an action, the user can operate changes on the received number and identity in the "Define Calls Direction" window. For example if the call is coming on a GSM port belonging to the "GSM" direction then the "ClientClass" will be set to "GSM".

The "NewClientClass" field will be used in further developments. To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

Note that the "Action" field has a button "..." to its right. If you want to edit "Action", click the button located to the right.

The window “Computing Action Field” shows up as indicated below:

Currently the following options are available "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and "DISA".

CALLBACK – The subscriber with the number form Identity is called back. If the field Callback includes a different mobile number, that number is called and the two subscribers are connected.

CALLBACKONSMS – this option allows calling back upon reception of a SMS message. The subscriber who has sent SMS can also be connected to another subscriber.

SMSTOMAIL – you can send e-mail messages via SMS. Previously, the address of the recipient must be filled in the field Mail. The text of the message to be transmitted is sent by SMS,

DISA – the subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is called back and receives DISA tone. This happens if the field “CallTo” does not contain another phone number. “Direct Inward Services Access’ allows the mobile subscriber to get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

Note: Callback calls are recorded in the SMS files.

TOPEX S.A. Page 46

TOPEX multiAccess

3.6.14 - ISUP configuration

Press the icon “ " and the "ISUP Configuration" window will appear:

An element that needs special attention in the configuration of ISUP for a TOPEX system using SS7 protocol is the circuit group. The "ISUP Configuration" window allows the allocation of the circuit groups (in range from 0 to 7).

each circuit group is enabled by the option "Group x", where "x" is from 0 to 6. "Connection ID" can take values from 0 to 31. The "Connection ID" fields are completed in "MTP

Configuration" window displayed after the user selects " " icon. "First Port" contains the first port from a SS7 card. "First CIC" (Circuit Identification Codes (CIC)) and "Range" are used to define all CIC values.

The SS7 trunks can be placed on card 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7). Ports for card 16 are in range 128-159, for card 17 in range 160-191, for card 32 in range 256-287 and for card 33 in range 288-319. For example the field "First Port" must be filled with the value 256 for an SS7 card installed on card 32. The range is establishing the total number of channels from the field "First Port". For a single SS7 card the range field will be 32. If two consecutive SS7 cards are used (for example 32 and 33) the range can take the value "64".

Warning: After you have added a new SS7 board to the multiAccess system, don’t forget to edit and verify the corresponding settings in the “ISUP configuration” window!

Page 47 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.15 - MTP Configuration For configuring the Signaling System 7 (SS7) boards that are installed in the TOPEX equipment, you must first configure the Message Transfer Part.

Press the icon (" ") and the "MTP Configuration" window will appear:

In this window the signaling point (SP) definitions are performed: SP definition (own codes) - this is the zone where the own (gateway) signaling points are defined. Each "SP" is

enabled by marking it in the appropriate checkbox. For each SP the "Code" and "Flag" must be set. For "Flag" a value of "1" is indicating that this node is an STP (signaling transfer point);

Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet) - this is the zone where the adjacent signaling points are defined. Each "Link set" is enabled by marking it in the appropriate checkbox. For each link set the associated "SP" and the "Code" must be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone;

Destinations - this is the zone where the destinations are defined. Each "Destination (Connection ID)" is defined by enabling the appropriate checkbox "Destination" field. The first four destinations are filled based on "Linkset" definitions - "SP" and "Code" fields are completed directly if the correspondence "Linkset" is defined. User can define indirect routes using the "Priority" fields. For each priority, the linkset is set as follows: there are three priorities - represented as three columns: "Priority 1", "Priority 2" and "Priority 3". Priority 0 is reserved for the direct route between the own SP and the destination. For each priority and for each destination, user can select one of the enabled linksets (the linkset list is filled with the linkset values enabled in "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)" zone). For each destination (with a number greater than 3) the associate "SP", "Code", "Priority" and "Linkset" can be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone.

TOPEX S.A. Page 48

TOPEX multiAccess

Note 1: the own SP code, the adjacent SP code and the nonadjacent SP code must have the same "NI" field.

Note 2: the ">>" button is used for destinations from 16 to 31.

Note 3: the zone "Code value" is used to automatically convert a hex code used to define a signaling point to the other known formats: "Code 2-3-8-3" and "Code NI-SP". The user must point with the mouse inside a "Code" edit field. The fields from the "Code value" zone will be filled with corresponding values. The option "Apply" is used to fill back the original "Code" edit field (an <ENTER" action on one of the fields from the "Code value" zone will cause a recalculation to be performed).

Warning: After adding a SS7 board to the multiAccess system, you must verify that the correct settings have been performed in the “MTP Configuration” and respectively “ISUP configuration” windows!

Examples: 1) to declare an own SP0 code "8b38", non-STP - check "SP0" in the "SP definition (own codes)" zone and then click the mouse on the edit field located in the right side of the "SP0" checkbox - you can directly complete the point code or you can edit the code value in the "Code value" computing zone. Here you can input the code in different formats. When you finish you press <ENTER> key and "Apply" button. You select "0" in the "Flags" field; 2) to declare an adjacent destination code (code "8103") - to the SP0 using linkset 0- check "Linkset 0", select '0' in "SP" list and fill the point code value with "8103"; 3) to declare a non-adjacent destination code (code "8547") - to the SP0 using linkset 0 on Connection ID 4. Select "Dest 4" checkbox, select "0" from "SP" list, complete code field and select linkset on the highest priority available box;

4) to declare an indirect route (linkset 1) to an adjacent destination code "8103" (linkset 0) - select linkset 1 in the highest priority available - on the row starting with "Dest 0".

3.6.16 - VoIP Configuration To configure the Voice over IP boards of the equipment, you click the appropriate icon (" ") and the "VOIP

Configuration" window will show up:

The "VOIP Configuration" contains several fields WHICH ARE IGNORED WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen.

The "VOIP Configuration" window contains two zones: "VOIP" and "H323". The type of protocol (H323 or SIP) is choosed from the "Protocol Type" field. When the "OK" option is clicked - the OAM application will load the settings from VoIP zone and depending upon "Protocol Type" selection - the settings from H323 or SIP zone will be saved.

Page 49 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 50

For the VoIP zone you can change the following settings:

- in "Protocol Type" the H323 checkbox enables the H323 signaling protocol.

- Version: with or without RTP transcoding. Transcoding means that our equipment performs conversion of codecs, that is the codecs used on the output are different from the ones used on the incoming call. For an incoming call from VoIP that goes out also through VoIP, the RTP channel is processed by the TOPEX equipment and transcoding may be performed. No transcoding means that the equipment performs VoIP signaling, but does not process the RTP channel, it goes directly from source IP to destination without going through the Topex equipment. In this case transcoding cannot be performed. The conversion of codecs may be required if the caller uses codec g711, but the destination supports only g728, so the Topex equipment must perfom transcoding. But if the called party also supports g711, no transcoding is required, and the RTP channel from the caller may be connected directly to destination.

- "PG Card IP Address" - the IP address of the processor card (PG card).

- "VoIP Card IP Address" - the IP address of the VoIP card. THIS FIELD HAS MEANING WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is not displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen. There are two situations concerning the PG Card IP address and respectively the VoIP card IP address. 1) when the box is installed in a LAN, then both addresses must be in the IP range addresses of that LAN. In this case the following ports must be opened if a firewall is used: the ports declared for RTP when the VoIP card was installed (for example 3000-3063). RTP ports are UDP and must be forwarded to the IP address of the VoIP card.The ports 1718, 1719 and 1720 are TCP and they must be forwarded to the IP address of the processor card (PG). 2) when the PG card is using a public IP address then the VoIP card must also use a public IP address.

- "VoIP Card MAC" - this value represent the MAC address assigned to the VoIP card. This value is preset or is given by TOPEX. THIS FIELD HAS MEANING WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is not displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen.

- "Public IP Address" - when the TOPEX gateway is used inside a LAN and when the H323 signaling is performed with a machine from the internet, then in this field you enter the external IP address of the LAN gateway. When H323 signaling is performed with a machine located inside the same LAN, then in this field you enter the same value as in the "VoIP Card IP Address" field. THIS FIELD HAS MEANING WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is not displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen.

- "IP GATEWAY MAC" - this field is filled in case of making RTP connections to a machine which is NOT in the same address range. THIS FIELD HAS MEANING WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is not displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen. 1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in the same LAN, then a program (MSPD) running on the Topex equipment automatically detects and fills the MAC of the target gateway. You will enter in the field “MSPD Parameters” the command “--no-gw”. This means no outside access is required. 2) when the remote VoIP gateway is on the the public IP address, then you must first use an utility (MSPD executable) to search and find out the MAC of the target gateway, then you must type this MAC address in the field “IP Gateway MAC”.

- “Audio Codecs”: a list of pairs <codec no><packetization time>, which are NOT delimited by commas. This is the list of codecs to be used by the RTP protocol. VoIP uses several different codecs, having different parameters (bit rate and complexity).The codecs used by Topex are coded with one or two digit numbers, such as 0 for g711u, 4 for g723.1, 8 for g711 or g711a, 15 for g728 and 18 for g729. The packetization time is usually 20 (milliseconds), but it may be as long as 30 msec or as short as 10 msec. For a specified codec, like g729, the number of channels supported depends of the packetization time. Increasing the packetization time reduces the packetization overhead, so when going form 20 msec to 10 msec the number of voice channels goes down form 60 to only 40.

- "Enable VAD" - this checkbox option allows the "Voice Activity Detection" facility to be used. Typical voice conversations can contain up to 35 to 50 percent silence. On VoIP networks, both conversation and silence is packetized. VAD sends out RTP packets only when voice is detected, thus decreasing bandwidth by 30-50 %. This way the Topex will send voice packets only when it has voice input. When it detects silence on RTP, it will send to the other side a “silence packet” that use less bandwidth and allows to be interpreted for generating comfort noise. - “LOG on MSPD” – enables logging on MSPD. The name of the log file will be “day-month-year_mspd.log”, such as 08-03-06_mspd.log THIS FIELD HAS MEANING WHEN "PG Configuration" icon is not displayed in the bottom-right zone of the OAM screen. - "Port MSPD" - MSPD is a program that controls the VoIP, in this field you can enter the number of the port to be used by MSPD, such as 9677 that is the default. - “RTCP” – RTP Control Protocol - This checkbox establishes if the equipment uses or not the control protocol for RTP.

The control protocol for RTP, RTCP is used for control and diagnostic on RTP sessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in the IETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintain Quality of Service . RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodically send each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

TOPEX multiAccess - “DTMF”-

This configuration area establishes the means of sending out DTMF in the RTP packets. There are two methods, transmission of DTMF out of band in RTP packets, or sending out INFO messages (as telephone-events). In SIP protocol, the INFO method would be used for the carrying of mid-call signaling information along the session signaling path (for example to send the DTMF digits generated during a SIP session) SIP INFO method can be used by SIP network elements to transmit DTMF tones out-of-band in a reliable manner independent of the media stream. It has advantages of reliabilty (the tones are not affected by low-rate codecs), of Provides DTMF tone generation for SIP requests and for Enables transport of DTMF digits along the signaling path.

The options available are: “DTMF-RTP”: if you chek this options, you must also complete the Parameters field to the right “DTMF INFO”: you select to send out DTMF tones as INFO messages “None” : the sending of dual-tone multifrequency signals is not treated by the Topex equipment.

Example for DTMF-RTP option: dtmfRTP 101 100 1 The syntax is: - payload type for DTMF in RTP (according to RFC 2833) - payload type for DTMF in RTP redundancy - redundancy scheme: 0 or 1, where 0=IETF and 1=AAL2

3.6.17 - SIP USERS

The "SIP USERS" button is used to declare the SIP USERS - this option is used in case when SIP users are registering to TOPEXequipment.

The last window - named "SIP Users" displays for each SIP user the following parameters: - SIP username - the registering status is indicated in the "username" background - blue - for user registered and red - for unregistered user - password - used together with SIP username for SIP user registration - description - a relevant description for the SIP user; - Client ID - unique value allocated to each SIP user - Class ID – the class to which SIP user belongs; it represents a direction name as it is defined in "Directions Names"; - CLIProxy - this is the ANI used for calls between SIP users. - CLIUA - identity of the SIP user - for SIP outgoing calls (not the case between SIP users registered to the connected TOPEX box), PSTN calls. - RTP_proxy – is used when the SIP user is behind a NAT; the available options are: “Not Used”, “Used except same NAT”, “Always Used”; by default the selected option is “Not Used”; - Transcoding – enables/disables the transcoding option;

Page 51 TOPEX S.A.


- Call PickUp Group –it can be selected a value from 1 to 50 representing the PickUp group to which the user is allocated; - Call Hunting Group – when the call is directed to the user, and this one is not responded for several reasons - the call will be directed to another user; if this one is not responded then the call will be directed to a third user. The routing call algorithm is based on „Call Hunting Priority” parameter.

Note: In order to accomplish this feature - the users must be in the same hunting group! Call Hunting Priority – represents the priority of the user inside the hunting group; the „0” value has the highest priority, and „10” the lowest priority.

Buttons "Add" and "Delete" are used to add SIP users/Remove SIP Users.

If the user press the "Add" button then the next window is displayed:

In the last picture you can notice all settings which are available for a SIP user. Most of them are available in the "Adding/modifying user settings" window. In order to set SIP user identity settings the "CLI" button is used. For establishing rules for DNIS (number) or ANI (identity) - the "Rules" button is used.

TOPEX S.A. Page 52

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 53 TOPEX S.A.

For each SIP user - the possible settings are: - SIP username - the registering status is indicated in the "username" background - blue - for user registered and red - for unregistered user - password - used together with SIP username for SIP user registration Alias zone: - alias - includes the alias through which a SIP user client can be called; there are allowed a maximum number of 6 alias fields. - description - a relevant description for the SIP user; - clientid - unique value allocated to each SIP user - Class ID – the class to which SIP user belongs; it represents the number of a direction as it is defined in "Directions Names"; Centrex zone: - Centrex Group – represents the "Centrex" group to which the SIP user belongs; - Centrex Alias - from 1 to 6 - the same SIP user can have more alias which are all used for calling by the SIP users belonging to the same center group. - RTP_proxy – is used when the SIP user is behind a NAT; the available options are: “Not Used”, “Used except same NAT”, “Always Used”; by default the selected option is “Not Used”; - Transcoding – enables/disables the transcoding option; - Reject Calls with no ANI – if is set then the calls to this SIP user without ANI are rejected; - Publish Presence – allows to report the SIP user status to a presence server.

Call PickUp Group –it can be selected a value from 1 to 50 representing the PickUp group to which the user is allocated; #0099CC – when the call is directed to the user, and this one is not responded for several reasons - the call will be directed to another user; if this one is not responded then the call will be directed to a third user. The routing call algorithm is based on „Call Hunting Priority” parameter. Note: in order to accomplish this feature - the users must be in the same hunting group!

Call Hunting Priority – represents the priority of the user inside the hunting group; the „0” value has the highest priority, and „10” the lowest priority.

Forking Group – this option is working in two modes: - when the same pair "Username/Password" are used for registration from different phones - then an incoming call from that user will be sent to each phone; such a feature is useful when there are more then one SIP phones in different location such at office or at home; - several SIP users can be grouped in the same „Forking Group”; when a SIP user from such a group is called - then all phones from that group will be called. Note: in each case - the first user which respond will take the call. Note: the forking group values are from 1 to 50.

„Call Forward” area: Call Forward – allows to redirect calls when the SIP user belongs to one of the call forward state; Selective Forwarding – enables the selective redirection; Call Forward State – this is a characteristic which contain one or more states which activate the redirection - „Offline” – the user is not registered; - „Busy” – the user is busy; - „No answer” – the user does not respond; - „Always” – all calls will be redirected. In the next four fields the redirect numbers are filled for each possible situation („Offline”, „Busy”, „No answer” and„Always”).

"Call Wait” area: - "Call Wait" – from the administrator side it enables to send calls to a SIP user even when this is not in „idle” state; - "Call wait state" – at user level - it checks if the „Call wait” option is activated on the phone side;

„Voice Mail” area: Voice Mail – if is enabled then the voicemail box message is activated; Voice Mail State – this is a characteristic which contain one or more states which activate the voicemail box: - „Offline” – the user is not registered; - „Busy” – the user is busy; - „No Answer” – the user does not respond; - „Always” – all calls are redirected to voice mail box; - „Voice Mail Number – the voice mail number to which calls will be redirected;


"Voice Mail2Email” area: Voice Mail to Email State – enables to send the voicemail messages to the specified email account; Voice Mail 2 Email – the email account where the message are sent;

"Access" area: Public – this field is set with the public IP address from which the SIP user is accepted; Private – this field is set with the private IP address from which the SIP user is accepted; Rules_in - if is enabled - the incoming rules set in "Rules" section are taken into account; Rules_out - if is enabled - the outgoing rules set in "Rules" section are taken into account In order to set the SIP identity the OAM user will press the "CLI" button: The "SIP users - CLI settings" window is displayed.

The available fields are: - CLI Proxy - this is a characteristic used for calls between SIP users. This field contains a list of all defined aliases together with the SIP username ; the default value is the SIP username - Proxy Privacy - by default this field is not enabled - case in which the identity is sent. If this field is enabled then - the identity is not sent. - CLI User Agent - identity of the SIP user - for SIP outgoing calls (not the case between SIP users registered to the connected box), PSTN calls. This field contains a list of all defined aliases together with the SIP username ; The default value is the default username - User Agent Privacy- by default this field is not enabled - case in which the identity is sent. If this field is enabled then - the identity is not sent. - CLI Centrex - this is a characteristic (ANI) used between SIP users from the same "Centrex Group". This field contains a list of all defined centrex groups - Centrex Privacy- by default this field is not enabled - case in which the identity is sentt. If this field is enabled then - the identity is not sent. - Display name – the name attached to the user which will be sent to destination; this field is sent for SIP calls (as display name) and on E1-SS7 trunk (as presentation number). - Display Name Privacy - by default this field is not enabled - case in which the display name is sent. If this field is enabled then - the display name is hidden.

In order to set the RULES for incoming / outgoing calls the "RULES" button is used:

The "SIP users - Rules Settings" window contains a list of defined rules for the selected SIP user. Each line contains a rule. The format of the rule is: - typeport - with three options: “Allow”, “Restrict” and “Forward”. You can specify allowed, restricted and forwarded numbers for the SIP user.

TOPEX S.A. Page 54

TOPEX multiAccess A rule can be deleted with the "Delete" button. "Add" button is used to add a new rule and "Edit" button is used to edit a rule. The next window named "SIP users - Rules settings" is displayed when "Add" or "Edit" button is selected.

The rule interpretation depend on how rules settings are established in "Adding/modifying user settings" window: - if "rules_out" is enabled then the DNIS - number - made by the SIP user is checked among the set rules - if "rules_in" is enabled then the ANI - identity- received bye the SIP user is checked among the set rules

For example: - if DNIS is filled with "0212000000" and "rules_out" is enabled and "Type" is "Restrict" then the specified number will not be allowed to be dialed by the SIP user. If you wish to restrict access to number such "89" then a rule with DNIS="89%" will be created - the "%" character will be interpreted as ANY DIGITS after 89. If you want to specifiy a combination like "8x9" where 'x' means ANY DIGIT then you'll use "8_9" (the "_" MEANS ANY DIGIT). For incoming rule - you can restrict access from specified ANI sources.

Page 55 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.18 - File transfer You can transfer files between the TOPEX gateway and the PC.

By choosing the clicking on the associated icon (" "), the window for file exchange labeled “Traffic files manager” will be displayed.

"Gateway Files - current" – the left panel of the window shows up the structure of files and folders from the system associated directory. You will see directories named "Alarms", "Billing", "Activity", "Viewer" and “Log”. You can change between those directories and the root directory of the connected system.

“Gateway Files – cfg” - the right panel of the window shows the files and folders structure located on the TOPEX Mobile gateway that is connected to the PC. The directory content (“bin” directory) of the files on the gateway is automated downloaded. You should see on the remote gateway three directories: “bin” (where is located the main telephony application), “cfg” (where the configuration files are stored) and “out” where the output files are written by the system. These files contain recordings for alarms, billing, ASR, monitoring (activity) etc. Between the two panes of “Traffic files manager” window you have the three function buttons shown below:

Upload button - Uploads a file from the computer to the TOPEX system

Download button - Downloads a file from the TOPEX system to the computer

Cancel - Closes the window “Traffic files manager”

When you want to download a file from gateway you enter in the directory from which you want to make download and choose a file. Note1: The file transfer is performed in “COPY” mode, not in the “MOVE” mode. This means that if you download a file from the TOPEX equipment to the OAM computer, the original file is left intact on the TOPEX system. Note2: It is mandatory to download files to appropriate destinations: alarms (*.alr format) and asr (*.asr format) in "Alarms" directory, billing (*.tax format) in "Billing" and activity (*.mon format) in "Activity". If you want to view a text file you can download it to "Viewer" folder. The options from tree commands "Alarms", "Billing" and "Activity" work with files with the previous extensions.

When a TOPEX multiAccess gateway is connected to the OAM program, Automatic file transfer is also allowed. See next paragraph about "Auto Downloading Files".

TOPEX S.A. Page 56

TOPEX multiAccess

3.6.19 - Auto downloading files In connection state, automatic file transfer is allowed.

Click on the “Auto Downloading Files” icon button (" ") - a window called “Download Files From Gateway” is displayed

Fill in the “From” and “Until” fields to define the time period of interest and check the boxes for the types of files you want (“Billing”, “Alarm”, “Activity”, “ASR”, “SMS”). The program will search for these files and download them from the remote TOPEX equipment. The files are automatically saved in directories according to their type. The default value for the time period is the current day (today).

"Download Billing Records (for today) starting with hour:" - is used to download from the billing file of the current day the records starting with the hour you want. The specified hour may be changed.

"Download Billing Records (for today) last: 100 (records)" - is used to download the last 100 records also from the billing file of the current day. The number of last records to be downloaded may be changed from the default value of 100. For anyone of last options the resulted billing records will be automatically displayed.

Note: The last two options for downloading billing records are mutually exclusive; they cannot be set at the same time.

3.6.20 - Clean HDD Space This option (" ") allows you to delete files from the TOPEX system. This can be needed if the equipment has been in use for a long time and has stored many large files on the hard disk. You may want to delete the older or not important files to make room for new files. You must choose the associated icon ("Clean HDD Space"). The window "Deleting Files From Gateway" allows you to choose a time period and the type of files to be deleted.

The type of files can be: Billing files (extension "*.tax"); Alarms files (extension "*.alr");

Activity files (extension "*.mon"); ASR files (extension "*.asr"); SMS files (extension "*.sms"); Log files (extension "*.log"); these files are

created by the gateway application when "Validate Debug" and "Validate Saving to File" are checked in "Parameters for ALERTING" window. Information that is saved in this kind of files is about the port activity for all ports in range "From" until "To", values which are specified in the same window for defining alerts.

State files (extension "*.sta"); these files are used to store the state for all ports (by state of a port we are meaning uninstalled, free, busy or alarm). These files are used by the web application.

By pressing "OK" option the requests for deleting files are sent to the gateway. The process of deleting the files can be observed in a list box which is displayed in the "Deleting Files From Gateway". At the end of deleting process a request for reading HDD occupied space is sent to the gateway. The indicator of the HDD space from the status bar will be changed if the occupied HDD space was changed on the gateway.

3.6.21 - File Editor

This option (" ") allows you to edit the configuration (.txt) files that can be loaded later into the TOPEX system. You must choose the associated icon ("File Editor"). The first window “File Editor Selection” allows you to navigate through the subdirectories structure in the system root directory in order to select the file you want to edit.

From this window you choose the text file to edit, and then a new dialog window will show up, with the content of the file. The selection is done by double clicking on the name of the file, so there is no need for an "OK" button - this window has only a "Cancel" button at the bottom.

There is a limit for the size of files to be edited; they should not be over 65,535 bytes in length.

Page 57 TOPEX S.A.


3.6.22 - PUTTY Click on the Putty icon “ ” to launch directly the "putty" application. In a state of connection between "gwconfig" program and a remote TOPEX gateway, Putty will connect on port 22 to the same IP address where "gwconfig" software is connected. The username will be sent automatically (it is taken from the name used for logging into the TOPEX gateway). Putty is a freeware program, which allows a secure access to a remote computer running LINUX operating system. A command interface allows the user to type and execute LINUX commands over the target. When you select the "Putty" icon from the OAM interface then as username and as password for login into the LINUX system will be used the same pair formerly completed to access the TOPEX gateway from OAM. With Putty you may administrate and configure directly the remote multiAccess gateway. You have real-time access to the log file, you can see what processes are running, the level of HDD usage, and all sort of low-level items that cannot be seen from the OAM program. For debugging purposes, you can see if the telephony application is running correctly, etc. Note: for security reasons, the direct logging as „root” cannot be performed. However, after login as user you may perform switching to root, if you type the adequate password.

3.6.23 - Loading hour You can upload the time into the TOPEX system. When you click on the icon (" ") for loading hour a dialog box will appear in which you can change also the computer time. Loading hour is very important because you modify the gateway clock: time and date. So this action is protected by password. This password is always "topex".

The default value shown is the date and time that are set on the computer where the OAM program is running. If you wish, you can change the date and time settings for the TOPEX E1/30 MOBILE gateway.

Select OK to upload the new settings to the system or select Cancel to close down the window. The Help button pop up a help window specific to the “Loading hour” command.

Before sending the modified time value to TOPEX system, the program performs a validity check. If you enter for the time and date values that are NOT VALID you will receive the error message shown to the right and you must start the “Loading hour” procedure al over again!

Note: The time you have uploaded will hold true only until the first reset of the TOPEX system. After reset, the time and date will revert to the previous value (that was in the BIOS of the TOPEX gateway.

3.6.24 - GSM Reprogramming Press the icon " “ if it is necessary to refresh the settings for all the mobile (CDMA or GSM) modules of the TOPEX equipment.

On the screen will appear the message „Confirmation” which contains the message „Do you wish to reprogram GSM modules?”. Press the „OK” button for confirmation or „Cancel” to abort the procedure.

This “GSM reprogramming” must be issued to allow the proper setting of the receiving or sending of the identity through mobile modules and also the setting of the audio level.

TOPEX S.A. Page 58

TOPEX multiAccess

3.6.25 - Alerts

This option (" ") establishes sending out the alerts, recording of ASR values and enables several debug and testing functions. Alerts are used in case of alarms or if ASR values fall below a selectable level.

In case of occurrence of different pre-programmed events, the TOPEX system can issue warnings (alerts) and also send out a description of the events. The alarms may be sent to the administrator of the equipment in three ways: By e-mail (a warning message that has attached the alarm files); By SMS; As a call on the mobile phone of the operator (several beeps).

The "Alerts" command shows the window for setting up the parameters for the alerts:

"Alert zone" - is used to activate (enable) the transmission of the alerts. It includes four small areas: Parameters, Dial Alert, SMS Alert and MAIL Alert.

The “Parameters” area contains the following fields:

Alert activated - must be checked in order to activate the alerts;

ASR alert limit - is used to set a level for activating ASR alert transmission when ASR value falls below the specified value. The ASR value is read at time interval specified in "Time period for checking". To validate the ASR alert a minimum number of calls must be set. Of course, if during the specified time period you have only one call, and it is not connected, this won't be relevant for ASR, so it is not taken into account;

Alarms for alerting - validate the type of alarms for which alerts are transmitted: "CCS-ISDN", "ASR" and "ALL";

Timer for testing alerts – field used for testing alerts. For a "0" value in this field the alerts will be sent only in real situations. For testing purposes a non-zero value (specifying the number of minutes) must be used.

Page 59 TOPEX S.A.


"DIAL alert" - is used if you want the alerts to be sent via phone calls. You must enter the phone number to be called upon alert. You may also set the number of beeps (1, 2, 3 etc) to be sent out in case of alert. By means of this variable number of beeps an operator can determine from which TOPEX system the alert is coming from: gateway A sends one beep, gateway B send two beeps and so on.

“SMS alert" is used in case of alerts by sending a SMS message to a mobile phone. You must enter the phone number to be alerted by SMS. You can also change the content text of the SMS alert message. This SMS alert message can be edited in a edit type window by pressing "File..." option to the right of the "SMS alert" area.

"MAIL alert" is used in case of sending e-mail alert messages to an email address. In case of activation of this kind of alert the following e-mail related parameters must be set: "Gateway address", "Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject", "Server" and "Port". You also have the facility to send the alert message with the current alarm file for the TOPEX gateway as an attachment. The text of the e-mail alert message can be edited in a edit type window by clicking "File..." option to the right of the "MAIL alert" area. Note: The following fields must not contain spaces inside the value: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject" and "Server"

SMS2MAIL - this option is used to forward all incoming SMS to an email address. This option is placed here because it works together with the settings established in the "MAIL alert" zone. The content of the SMS will be sent to the address specified in the field "MailTo".

"ASR Reading Parameters" – establishes the ASR reading procedure. First, to activate the ASR reading process the option "Validate ASR reading" must be checked. Then the interval (in minutes) for reading and saving ASR values is set in "ASR read period" field. Please note that this value must be the same with the value entered above in the field "Time period for checking" used for ASR alerts. "Debug Parameters" - used for the debugging process. This facility is intended to help debugging the TOPEX system: log files for the equipment are created and respectively displayed. If the "Validate Debug" box is checked then all activities on ports specified in range "From" and "To" is displayed. If "Validate Saving" is also checked, this information will be saved in log files on target. "GSM" - is used for: 1) "CELL, LEVEL and Channel" interrogation. The GSM scanning is launched by checking the option "Validate Cell Interrogation". The "GSMScan" value is the value in seconds at which each GSM module is searched upon cell, level and channel. If a call is passing through a GSM module and if the "GSMScan" value is reached, the interrogation upon the mentioned values will be done after the call ending. 2) The reset of the "Load Sim" values - the user can enable the option "Validate Reset of Load Sim values" and specify the "Day and Time" at which those times of SIM using values are resetting. User will fill the time moment in "hour minute day" format. These values are separated by space character. The "Load Sim" values can be reset in each day at the specified time "hour minute" if the "day" is filled with "0". The "Load Sim" values can be reset on each month at the specified time "hour minute" if the "day" is filled with the desired day. If one of the values "hour" and "minute" are wrong then the reset will not occur.

There are the following text limits at the fields: "ASR alert limit", "ASR read period", first port and last port - 3, "Time period for checking" - 4, "Minimum calls number" - 4, "Timer for testing alerts" - 3,"Beep Number Identifier" - 2, "Gateway address", "Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject" and "Server" – 40 characters.

“Simserver" - is used in case of multiAccess equipment which is working with GSM cards Simserver. The "simserver" zone contains an activation checkbox "Activate", the IP of the simserver and the port to connect to (default value is 13001). Finally the "Name" is the gateway identification name, name which is also set in simserver to recognize the gateway client.

3.6.26 - Testing calls

Press the icon " " - for enabling test calls. This command allows you to perform phone calls for testing the equipment. If you click this button, the window will appear where you can enable and define phone test calls that will be performed by the TOPEX gateway.

Test calls must be first enabled with the option "run 1" (to disable test calls, a line with option "run 0" must be used). For each test call two parameters will be used: "pause xx" and "con yy" which represent the time period between two attempts (xx) and the time to keep the call (yy). After the record preceded by "#nr" the test calls definition follows: each line will contains the number to be dialed, the identity of the call, the caller port and a value of 0 or 1. With value '0' in a record the number will be first analyzed with the definition of the direction (the direction that contains the specified port) and after that will be analyzed according to the routing table. With a value of '1' in a record, the number will be sent out directly from the port.

TOPEX S.A. Page 60

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 61 TOPEX S.A.

For example: a test record can be "12345 101 257 1". It means an outgoing call with number '12345" and identity "101' is sent on port 257.

Note1) a good method for testing calls and to analyse the routing process is to add a subscriber card and to add a record in the "TESTING calls" window with an installed port from the subscriber card (that port must have also the option of making calls). For example if the card 15 is a subscriber card then a record for port "120" will be: "0700000000 120 120 0" Note2) for making test calls on E1 trunks or GSM cards an example was giving before: "12345 101 257 1", For sending the number digit by digit a value "0000" must be used to fill the "Signaling" field for the direction that contains the test port. Note3) test calls are very useful in finding the available number of GSM channels. Test calls are simultaneously generated towards the vocal messaging. After the test calls sequence is started, the number of connected calls can be observed by using "Live monitoring" facility.

You must notice that each line contains the prefix "traffic_" concatenated with "run", "idle", "sel" ,"con’ and "call". In order for this new method to work, the user must create a direction with the name "SENDCALL" (icon "Directions Names"). The "Type" field must be completed with "DIR" in "Calls directions". All those test calls are generated from this fictive direction "SENDCALL".

- "traffic_run 0 1 test" – to disable this second method for launching calls: you can type "0" after "traffic_run". To enable the method – you must type "1".

The second number specified in this line is the number of test calls that can be generated at the same time (in the example above it is "1"). The list with the test calls is described by the lines beginning with "trafic_call".

The "test" word is used to specify the tonality heard by the called part (in this case a flashing tone):

- "traffic_idle 10 5" – specifies the time to wait before to launch a new test call. The first digit (in this case 10) means the number of seconds to wait. To this value you may add the next value (it can be present or not ) which means a range for a random value. The random number can be between zero and that value. In the above example, the random range of five means that the random value is between 0 and 5. Consequently, the waiting time will get random values between 10 (10+0) and 15 (10+5).

- "traffic_sel 5 3 " – specifies the value used to simulate the selection time for test calls. Here also the first digit (in this case 5) means the starting number of seconds to simulate the selection time. To this start value may be added the next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example, three means a random value between 0 and 3. Thus the number used to simulate the selection time for test calls will have get random values between 5 (5+0) and 8 (5+3).

- "traffic_con 1 2" – specifies the value used to simulate the conversation time for test calls. The first digit (in this case 1) means the starting number of seconds to simulate the conversation time. To this start value may be added the next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example, two means a random value between 0 and 2. Hence, the value used to simulate the duration of the test calls will take random values between 1 (1+0) and 3 (1+2)

- "traffic_call nr id" – specifies the number("nr") to be dialed and the identify ("id")


3.6.27 - Halt and Reboot commands Those two commands are similar to the LINUX commands.

- The first command, HALT, is equivalent the “halt” command in Linux and stops the machine (assures normal shutdown).

- The second, REBOOT, restarts the machine.

After a HALT command, the TOPEX system may be safely powered down (disconnected from the power supply). Incorrect shut down of the equipment may cause damage of the file system of files and other problems. For instance, you will experience a large delay in stat-up of the system due to the exhaustive system check. This “long” verification of the file system happens if the TOPEX gateway has been improperly stopped (without using the “halt” command).

3.6.28 - Configuration list The icon " " displays a visualization window with the settings of all ports (rights, number, target, direction, SIM index regarding type of port).

The list is built in physical order of ports starting with 000.

In the picture above it can be seen GSM positions for which are given the following settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT', direction, SIM index, target, Pin1, Pin2, Pin3 and Pin4 values. Also it can be seen ISDN channels settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT', ‘Direction’ and ‘ISDNUSER’.

By using the 'FIND' and 'NEXT' buttons you may search for a text string in this window.

3.6.29 - Automatic requests Press the icon " " for auto-download of alarms and ASR info from all of the TOPEX systems that are connected (using IP communication). The icon command (button " ") is "Automatic Requests". Click on it and the OAM program will automatically launch (at pre-established time intervals) interrogation requests for the installed TOPEX systems. The request may be about alarmed modules and about ASR value (both general and instantaneous). This is very useful when you have several TOPEX gateways, because you no longer need to connect manually to each one to ask it for the alarms and ASR information.

TOPEX S.A. Page 62

TOPEX multiAccess

Period – set the time interval (in seconds) for the interrogation of all TOPEX systems that are connected. These values must be greater or at least equal to 60 seconds;

ASR - select a limit for the ASR value: when the general or instantaneous value is under the established level, By double-clicking with left mouse button a statistic is shown with the last 24 values for instantaneous ASR (for all of the TOPEX system which are currently installed and in the process of automatic interrogation);

ALARMS Alert - pane of the Automatic Requests window allows you to select different kind of alarms. When these alarms occur in the TOPEX system, they will be shown and stored.

There are two different “Automatic Requests” windows, depending if the process of automatic interrogation of all TOPEX gateways is started or not.

When the interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown in the dialog window title. You must select the types of alarms. The start of the automatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. The interrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed at any moment by selecting "Change" value.

When interrogation process is started the text "STARTED" will be shown in the dialog box title. "View" option is for displaying a statistics on last 24 values for instantaneous ASR (for the TOPEX systems that are in automatic interrogation process).

When the specified period expires the request for system interrogation will be launched. The text "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS!!!" will be displayed in the first box of the status bar. In the next box to right side all messages will enclose the TOPEX system name (connection name).

During the automatic interrogation procedure it is allowed to connect to a system only if the OAM software is in a pause between two interrogations. If it is in the middle of an interrogation, you may still stop the automatic procedure that is in the process (when status bar shows the text "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS!!!") by selecting the "Disconnect" command from any of the systems. Then the OAM program will again wait for the established time period before issuing automatic requests for interrogation.

Notes:

Normally if you have connected to a TOPEX system you can perform Disconnect only from that system. However, when in automatic request mode, the Disconnect command may be sent from any TOPEX system!

If the connection is broken with Disconnect command, only the ASR and alarms that have already been scanned will be downloaded.

3.7 Arborescent structure

The OAM program for TOPEX multiAccess gateway uses an arborescent (tree-like) structure of files and folders, as shown in the figure to the right. Since the OAM program can configure and manage up to maximum 50 (fifty!) different E1/30 Mobile systems, each of them uses a different folder (cfg_name) for its files. Each of these directories (related to a specific TOPEX system) features all of the items shown to the right: Connect, Disconnect, Parameters, Alarms, Billing, Activity, ASR, SMS, Viewer, Log, etc. and has the corresponding subdirectories. The tree-like structure also has items with “viz_name”. This comes from “visualization” and indicates a configuration that has been saved for editing and later uploading to other gateways.

Page 63 TOPEX S.A.


Description of arborescent structure

cfg_< Name > or

Identifier of the TOPEX system: cfg_ are configurations of remote gateways where the program is connected, while viz_ identifies local configurations, saved on the HDD for editing and later uploading viz_< Name >

Connect… Initiates a connection to that system

Disconnect, breaks the connection to the system if this connection was open Disconnect…

Displays in a new window the parameters of the connection to the system Parameters

Displays in the window to the right the configuration received at the latest status inquiry to the TOPEX system Last configuration

Alarms Displays in a window to the right the alarm files

Billing Displays in a window to the right the billing files

Loading Displays a statistics of call, on ports and directions

Activity Displays in a window to the right the monitor (activity) files

Displays the ASR (Answer Seizure Ratio) files. These files contain the ASR values, average times, total number of calls and number of answered calls, total seized time and total connected time.

ASR

Displays the SMS files. They are used for SMS and test calls that are sent from the Internet. SMS

You can view in the window to the right text files with any kind of extension Viewer

Displays in the window to the right the files with extensions .log and .lch Log

3.8 Status bar description The status bar at the bottom of the screen is divided into six columns, as shown below.

The first three columns (starting from left) display indicators for supervision of the connection. These three fields are filled with information only in the state of connection between the "gwconfig" software and a TOPEX gateway. The exception is when using the automatic interrogation procedure - the first column is used to display the time remaining until a new interrogation procedure is about to be started.

Thus you will see something like this: When that time (2 seconds in the above example) elapses and the requests are transmitted, the first box of the status bar will display the text "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS!!!".

The first (leftmost) column shows the current command, while the next two display information about the execution of that command.

First column " " indicates the number of commands that will be send to the gateway. Each modification (changes on configuration files or on gateway ports) or data request that is performing on the gateway is translated into commands. Those commands are sent to the TOPEX equipment. The second column and the third column are showing protocol messages, protocol which is implemented between "gwconfig" software and the connected gateway. These messages enclose the name of TOPEX system (connection name), such as “cfg_E1/30 GSM” in the above example. The fourth column displays the current date and time of the system. The format is dd-mm-yyyy hh-mm-ss

(" "). In addition, this column may contain information about the time limit for the TOPEX license. You can be shown here either that no license limitation is present on your system ("no limit licence") or that a time limit is present for the license (something like "30 licence days"). The number shows how many days you have left for the limited license. After the specified period, the application running on the gateway will stop processing the calls. Then you must contact TOPEX to get a “serial” (character string) that will allow further operation of the gateway.

TOPEX S.A. Page 64

TOPEX multiAccess

The fifth column is an indicator for the HDD free space on the target: (the percent value is displayed). The color used is light blue if the available HDD space is over 90% and red otherwise. This value is shown only in the connected state. The sixth and rightmost box (column) of the status bar is an indicator for the connection:

Light blue if the OAM program is connected to a system ;

Red if the program is NOT connected to a TOPEX system . Display issues

The panel to the right side of the tree structure window is used for two kinds of windows. First type of window is called "Modify Configuration" in the state connection between the "gwconfig" software and a TOPEX gateway or "View Configuration" when "Last configuration" command is selected.

In "Modify Configuration" window the right mouse button is used for adding / removing cards; if you click the same right mouse button over the status bar a message ("Do you wish to disconnect?") will be displayed, asking you if you want to disconnect the connection.

For the case when "View Configuration" window is displayed the right mouse button is used to hide the window. The confirmation message used is "Do you wish to hide last configuration?".

Both "Modify Configuration" and "View Configuration" window include in the title bar the name of the current TOPEX connection. Only an action upon the tree command called "Disconnect" for the TOPEX system that is connected or viewed will cause the disconnection of the link between OAM and the connected/viewed gateway. This is true both in the first case (actual connection) and in the second case (the display of the "Do you wish to hide configuration?" message).

The second kind of window is the one used to display different kind of files as a result to actions over tree options: "Billing", "Alarms", ASR", "SMS", "Activity”,” Log" and "Viewer". In this situation the title of the window includes the words "Local Viewer" and the system name. An action with the right mouse button will cause the message "Do you wish to hide?" to be displayed.

For "Billing", "ASR", "SMS" and "Activity" an appropriate filter can be applied for viewing the records, then the window that contains the list of the files will be automatically hidden. For the other options the data will be displayed in the same "Local Viewer" window.

The content of that second window can be updated with other data simply by selecting another option from the tree structure.Last configuration. With this option we can see last downloaded configuration (that has been modified or not) for the chosen TOPEX gateway. If you select this option you'll be shown the "View configuration" window.

This tree command makes you be able to view offline the last configuration: ports setting, route table, calls directions, SIM table, holydays settings and so on. Because you are off-line, the configuration can bee seen, but not changed.

Page 65 TOPEX S.A.


3.9 File structure The OAM program uses several types of files: for alarms, events, billing information, etc. Most of the files are text type, so they can be easily viewed and also modified using a standard text file editor such as Notepad for Windows.

The files have different extension, in order to be quickly identified: .alr for files with the alarms, .tax for billing (tax) files, .mon for monitor (supervision of activity) files that include detailed information about each call, .log files for recording the events (making/breaking of connections), .lch for the files that record the changes made to the TOPEX system, .asr and so on.

The name of these files is given by the field "name" (see option "Gateway Parameters") concatenated with the current date (day-month-year) and followed by the extension.

If you leave the "name” empty, the name of the file will be given by the date (day-month-year) only.

3.9.1 Alarm files By selecting the command “Alarms” from the tree-like structure you will be able to see all the alarm files from the “Alarms” directory of the TOPEX system you have chosen.

The alarm files are named <current date>.alr and they include the following fields:

Field Interpretation

Current date dd/mm/yy

Current time hh:mm:ss

Alarm status SET - blocked (appearance of alarm)

RES - unblocked (disappearance of an alarm)

TOPEX S.A. Page 66

TOPEX multiAccess

Type of alarm

PROCUP - the processor is started. This is an event, it works only with SET, not set/reset

PROCDN - the processor is stopped. This is an event; it works only with SET, not set/reset.

ALIM val - Supply indicator

JONBLOCK - junction alarm

APFALS - local subscriber alarm

CARDERR - board alarm

LIS - Loss of Incoming Signal (is an alarm that indicates that there is no signal on the E1 trunk input)

LFA - Loss of Frame Alignment (is an alarm that indicates that the frame alignment is not detected)

LMA - Loss of Multiframe Alignment (is an alarm that indicates that the multiframe alignment is not detected)

AIS - Alarm Indication Signal (the alarm is send by a transmission equipment to indicate the lost of the input signal on the E1 trunk )

RSA - Remote Signaling Alarm (is an alarm which is transmitted by the gateway when one of the following alarms is detected: LIS, LFA or AIS)

RJA - Remote Junction Alarm (is an alarm which is transmitted by the gateway when LMA alarm is detected)

CCS - Common Channel Signaling Alarm. Warns about the data link for the ISDN E1 trunk.

SLIP - This alarm event is caused by non-synchronous operation of the two equipment (TOPEX system and PBX or VoIP gateway).

BER val - Bit Error Rate; val is a number from zero to three that shows the error rate as follows: 0 = 10-6, 1 = 10-5, 2 = 10-4, 3 = 10-3.

Number of the alarmed port Port

Card Number of the alarmed card

Please note that some of the alarm fields are meaningful only for the alarm files of the digital trunk E1.

By choosing "Alarms" - tree command for a system, all alarm files from the folder "Alarms" of the system directory we'll be shown.

Select the alarm file you want. By double clicking the left mouse button a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective display of the alarms. This filter for alarms permits the setting of options and values for searching records inside the Alarms subdirectory.

The field "Period" indicates by default the time period corresponding to the name of the alarm file that was selected. This period can be changed in order to extend the time interval that is analyzed. The software will look for records in the alarm files name whose name falls inside the selected time period.

There is an option to view only certain types of alarms and to specify the card and the port number for them.

You can select only alarms appearances / disappearances or both.

Note: The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods and 3 for the fields that are specifying a card or a position number.

Page 67 TOPEX S.A.


Before the filter validation, the correctness of the period definition is checked. If the value you entered is wrong, you will see an error message.

When you click the "OK" button all of the alarms that correspond with the filtering criteria will be displayed in the “Local Viewer” window.

Once you define a filter for the alarms, its configuration will be saved, so you can use the same filter for several alarm files.

Each record of the alarm file shows the time (date, hour) when the alarm condition has appeared (with “SET”), the time when the alarm condition has disappeared (with “RES”), a short text describing the alarm (such as CARDERR for board error, LIS for Loss of Incoming Signal, etc, then two numeric type fields that show the position (0024 or 0256) and the board (00, 01 or 32) that is in an state of alarm.

3.9.2 Billing files

The billing files are named <current date>.tax and include the information required for detailed billing (taxation) of the calls.

During the development period, the information which is saved in the billing file was increased by adding columns. In the following explanations is described the basic billing file structure; at the end of this short description, the table which contains the billing fields will present also the new added columns.

The following example - with an answered call - contains a VoIP call (source port "260)" with the phone number dialed "210711972569". The identity of the call is "306";

TJI,00261,306 ,210711972569 ,19-05-08,10:58:17,000003,00001,00,00064,BOK , 16,226019651342734 , 10,0000, SIPusers ,192.168.1.152 ,5060 ,192.168.1.152 ,49156,192.168.148.3 ,0 ,192.168.110.233 ,31010,082b79cf, 0, 0, 2,GSM ,SIP ,CAS , 0, 20, 0, ,306 ,0711972569 ,306 ,0711972569

The source of the call can be either VoIP, E1, ISDN-BRI port or an analogic port like GSM, FXS or FXO. The number and the identity can be subject to modifications by the TOPEX box. Changes are caused by applying the rules about the ignore and insert operations and the maximum expected digits from the "Define Calls directions". Also, if a route exist for the dialed number, changes can be made by the ignore and insert operations from "Routing table". In the billing files the phone number and the identity will always be the original ones; The total number of digits that can be treated correctly by "gwconfig" software is 20, both for identity field and for the number field; The number, the identity and the IMSI values used here are for example purposes only;

TOPEX S.A. Page 68

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 69 TOPEX S.A.

A billing file has the following fields: Field Description Call type TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This values indicates the physical port position. This value can be 65535 in case of a multiswitch.

Source identity subscriber number or caller identity (20 digits)

CallDigits (Call Number)

call number (20 digits)

Day and Time Day and Time of the call in the following shape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss (ending time) Connected Duration xxxxxx - speaking duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

Billing Units for the call

xxxxx - billing Units for the call (5 digits)

This field is usually filled with 0 for non-answered calls and with 1 for answered calls. However if tax pulses calculation is set on incoming direction (see "Signaling2" settings in "Define Calls Direction") then this value will be filled according with the number of pulses charged at response and on time bases (see "Tax" field in "Routing Table").

Destination SIM Number

When the destination port is a GSM port it specifies a value for SIM from the next list: (0,1,2,3 or ff). The OAM application is adding a unit to the SIM value - this approach is used for simplicity - this rule is applied when billing records are displayed. The same rule is applied for the "SIM index" case when the SIM card to be used (1,2,3,4) is chosen.

Destination Port

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is unfinished a value of 65535 will be found in this field (5 digits) In case of a TOPEX multiswitch - calls terminated with success will have also 65535 in this field.

Finalization call mode

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT,BTOUT,AERRAUTH,ANOCRED,AFINCRED,AVMAIL,BVMAIL,NOVOIPCH,CODECERR,NOLICENCE,ACLREJECT.

It indicates the mode of ending the call: - first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party or B=called party - next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK - ANSWER (response in the destination part) RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy) INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route) CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no available resources) SERR - SERR (Signaling error) NERR - NERR (Network error) NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone) BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation) TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration) AERRAUTH - when the ANI or prepaid user is not authenticated on RADIUS ANOCRED - when the ANI or prepaid user has no credit available AFINCRED - for ANI or prepaid user when the credit expires during the call AVMAIL - BVMAIL - when a call is finished on vocal message box - cause of non answer on the B side NOVOIPCH - when no VoIP channel is available CODECERR - when the source codec is not in the list of supported codec - list defined in "VoIP Configuration". NOLICENCE - indicates two situations: 1) that the LICENCE had expired and 2) that the LICENCE is not granted for the requested protocol - for example VoIP or SS7. The LICENCE of a gateway can be seen in licence feature. ACLREJECT - indicates for an incoming VoIP call that the IP is not in access list or the number of digits is different then the expected value or the number of incoming calls is greater that the threshold value. This limits are set in DIRIPIN section.

Finalization call mode on ISDN calls

Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values corresponding to ISDN standard for call release codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (when the destination port is a GSM port) Selection xxx- three digits - total time (in seconds), cumulated value of both dial time and selection time


TOPEX S.A. Page 70

Duration

CELL For a call routed through a GSM port it represents the CELL of the mobile network where the SIM was registered.

Direction

The direction to which the destination port is belonging (it is the output direction)

In case of TOPEX software versions released after 2006 - this field has the interpretation of incoming direction. This direction can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for example GSM or E1 - ISDN/SS7) or a direction used for incoming VoIP calls - which is the generic "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (without ports) used just to allow inserting/ignoring digits from number or identity (see DIRIPIN section).

IP address and RTP port

The IP source and destination address and the RTP source and destination port in case of a VoIP call. This info includes the Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the source, the RTP IP and RTP port for the source, followed by Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the destination, and lastly the RTP IP and RTP port for the destination. For the VoIP incoming calls, the destination signaling IP is the one of the PG card of the equipment, while the destination RTP is the IP of the VoIP card. In case of VoIP outgoing calls, the source RTP IP is the one of the VoIP card of the Topex equipment, while the destination RTP is the one of the remote VoIP card that made the call.

Session_id This is an unique identifier of a call inside the equipment software. It is useful for a call debugging inside the equipment log files.

Jitter Jitter is a variation in packet transit delay caused by queuing, contention and serialization effects on the path through the network.

Packet Loss VoIP packet loss occurs when a large amount of traffic on the network causes dropped packets. This results in dropped conversations, a delay in receiving the voice communication, or extraneous noise on the call.

Client_id

Direction - output direction

This direction is the output direction and can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for example GSM or E1 - ISDN/SS7) or a direction used for outgoing VoIP calls - which can be the generic "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (without ports) used just to specify the VoIP protocol and the signaling destination IP (see DIRIPOUT section).

Proto in protocol used on incoming side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7) Proto out protocol used on outgoing side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7)

Payload Type

the value of codec: G729 - 18 G723 - 4 G711, G711a - 8 G711u - 0

Packetization Time

The Packetization Time is the length of the digital voice segment that each packet holds. The default is 20 millisecond packets. Selecting 10 millisecond packets enhances the voice quality, as less information is lost due to packet loss, but doubles the load on the network traffic.

Out_Client_id Gw_name Name of the gateway (which is by default empty) - but can be set in "Gateway Parameters" window.

Id_out ANI (identity) send on the outgoing link - ANI can be changed based on the settings involving the identity from "Calls Directions" and/or "Routing Table".

Nr_out DNIS (number) made on output link - DNIS which can be changed based on the settings involving the dialed number from "Calls Directions" and/or "Routing Table".

Orig_ANI original ANI of the call. this field can take another value in case of SIP user (in case of a VoisTel box) with call forward activated. in such a case "Orig_ANI" will store the identity of the SIP user which was activated the forward.

Con_DNIS this field is used in case of a call forwarding - when the SIP user (in case of a VoisTel box) has the call forward option enabled. In such a case in this field will be stored the number to which the call will be forwarded.

By selecting “Billing” from the tree-like structure .you will be able to see all the billing files from the “Billing” directory of the TOPEX system that you have selected.

TOPEX multiAccess

- go to the billing file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mouse button a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective display of the billing information. This filter for billing (taxation) files permits the setting of options and values for searching records inside the subdirectory for billing.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period corresponding by default to the name of the billing that you have selected. You may change this default period to extend the time interval that is analyzed. For each of the "From" and "Until" limits, subfields are "Day" and "Hour". The program will look for records in the billing files whose name falls inside the selected time period.

From the source point of view you may specify these options: - physical position of the source port - port number (for an exchange subscriber call) or caller identity - a direction - a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names" - the source port type: local or junction (trunk)

Page 71 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 72

From the call destination (called part) point of view you may specify these options: - digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records with the number of destination digits less, equal or greater than the value typed. - physical position of destination port - a direction- a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names" - a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is a GSM port) - a value for IMSI code - a value for CELL code The section "IP and Port Filter" contains several options to select:

From the incoming call side: From the ougoing call side: - signaling IP - signaling IP - signaling port - signaling port - RTP IP - RTP IP - RTP port - RTP port

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also the billing records have a caller and a

called party. For an incoming call on E1 trunk the source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will be routed over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will be represented by 'A' and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Depending by the side which ends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode will contain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS - RELEASE, INEX - INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS - NO ANSWER, BUSY - BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT. "Call Type" lets you to specify the mode of ending of the call.

Note: physical port position on a E1 trunk is computed in the following procedure: for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) the port will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk and for E1 trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number on E1 trunk.

You may set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represents call release code for ISDN calls. Other types of calls will display a value of ' 31' in the billing records.

You may also set the option to select the records with the conversation duration and the selection duration (in seconds) less, equal or greater than the value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for the number of digits, 3 for the source port position, sim index and ISDN EndType, 5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 3 for selection duration, 16 for specifying IMSI code and 20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the billing filter are checked before validation (by pressing the button "OK"). The program checks correctness of the following:

- period definition (day and hour - day less or equal to 31, month less or equal to 12, year less or equal to 36, hour less or equal to 23, minute less or equal to 59 and second less or equal to 59); - port position of the call source (in range 0 to 319); - sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255); - destination port position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319); - duration and selection duration (a value greater or equal to zero); - number of digits (a value greater or equal to zero); - ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal to zero);

If something is wrong, an error message will be shown to the user and the field that has caused the error will be colored in red (while the text color becomes white). When the user goes back to the incorrect field in order to correct the wrong data, then the red color will disappear. In the following example an error message "Wrong port value" is displayed because of an error field on port position (a value "342" which is greater than the maximum number of 319).

TOPEX multiAccess

Finally, you can set the option for viewing only the totals of the recording (option "Display only the total without the records") that corresponds to the selected criteria or you can choose to display the values without totals (option "Display only the records without a total").

The option "Display only the records without a total" is useful for filtering out the records in a certain time interval for the purpose of post-processing of the stored billing information (post-processing is done for cost analysis). For these applications, you need a text file with values only (that may be imported into a spreadsheet like Excel) but without totals interspread in it.

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayed in the "Billing Report". These columns will be explained later in this chapter. The information regarding the billing columns to be displayed is stored in the file "tax_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same directory from where "gwconfig" software is running. In this file it is also saved the information about the size of the columns presented in the billing report.

Page 73 TOPEX S.A.


By pressing "OK" button all Billing records corresponding to the filter criteria will be seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from the selected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts (field "Attempts"), total number of connected calls (field "Connected"), ASR (field "ASR"), total duration of calls (conversation part-field "Duration"), associated billing units (field "TaxUnits"), and at the end a total for all of the intervals - total number of attempts, total number of connected calls, ASR, total duration and billing units. Note1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer" subdirectory for the chosen system in a file with the "tot" extension and the name corresponding to the selected time interval. This way you may get both the total of calls for several days and also a general total.

Note2: Once you have defined a filter for the billing files, some of its settings will be saved, so you can apply the same filter to several billing files. The settings established in the billing filter are saved in the file "tax_fl.dat" on the harddisk in the directory where "gwconfig" software is running. These settings are:"Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriber part and junction part, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER", "RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and "TIMEOUT") and the options regarding the viewing of totals and billing records ("Display only the total without the records" and "Display only the records without a total"). These settings are loaded before the showing of the billing filter in order to be pre-established.

Note3: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field). The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The first operation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character "^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication will be the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Ident" is provided for both ascending and descending sort. Depending of the number of records the sorting operation can take a significant amount of time.

TOPEX S.A. Page 74

TOPEX multiAccess

3.9.3 SMS files These files are used to keep information regarding the sending of short text messages (SMS) and about the calls made from an internet browser. SMS's can be sent and CALLS can be made from any internet browser by accessing the TOPEX gateway. The "SMS" files are named <current date>.sms. The SMS files are also containing the CALLBACK actions.

1) To send a SMS just connect to the gateway to the "txsms.html" page (to reach this page, you must first type into the browser's address bar the IP address of the TOPEX gateway).

For accessing the TOPEX gateway, you must add its IP address to the section "Trusted sites" for your browser. The format of the record to be added is http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/txsms.html where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the TOPEX gateway. The authentication of clients is performed using "Digest Authentication" algorithm. Accessing TOPEX gateway from an Internet browser is password protected. You must logon with your name and password. The default user name and password are "topex".

Send SMS to phone After going over the password protection, a new page will show up, the “SMS Web Server”. You must accomplish the hereunder steps:

Fill in the SMS destination phone number (field "Phone Number");

Write the SMS message (field "SMS text");

Click the option “SendSMS” for sending SMS.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has been sent ("OK Your SMS was sent OK! Thank you!").

Example of SMS records in a SMS file: SMS, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:24:50, 000005, 00004, 00, 00008, BOK, 16, 222222222222222 SMS, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:26:12, 000000, 00000, ff, 65535, ASERR, 16, SMS, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:27:02, 000000, 00000, ff, 65535, AINEX, 16,

first record is containing a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The SMS was sent successfully ("BOK");

second record contains a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The SMS was not sent successfully because the direction called "SENDSMS" was not existent on the target ("ASERR");

the third record is containing a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The SMS was not sent successfully because no route to destination was found ("AINEX");

Note 1): the total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig" software is 20; Note 2): the number, the identity and the IMSI values which are used are only for testing purposes; Note 3): the code "WWW" is used only to indicate the origin of the SMS ("WWW");

Send SMS to group You may also send SMS messages to a whole group of mobile phone numbers – the destination is not a single number. For this, you must enter another Web page of the TOPEX server. The page called "txsmsgrp.html" is used to send a SMS to a group on mobile phones destination.

Page 75 TOPEX S.A.

http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/txsms.html


The "Group Name" field in the adjacent picture will be filled in with the group name: in the displayed example the group name is "test" (the word which follows the key word "grup". The SMS will be sent to the phone numbers that follow the line with "grup" keyword. The numbers are searched until an empty line is found or until another line starting with "grup" is found.

fill in the name of the group where you want to send the text message; write the SMS message (field "SMS text"); click the option “SendSms” for sending SMS to all phone

numbers.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has been sent ("Your SMS has been sent OK! Sent to 2 numbers"). The number of mobile phone destinations is also displayed.

Send CALL A call can be send in the same manner, by accessing the page "txcall.html" at the IP address of the multiAccess gateway. To allow the sending of a call from an Internet browser, the direction called "SENDCALL" must exist on the target. In addition, the call will be parsed to all the rules that are included in the definition of the "SENDCALL" direction and the routing table.

For sending a call, perform the next operations:

Access the page "txcall.html";

Fill in the phone number destination of the call (field "Phone Number");

Press “SendCall” button to make the calls from the TOPEX gateway.

A message will show up, to inform the user that the call will be made Example of records concerning making CALLS from a SMS file: CALL, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:45:49, 000000, 00000, ff, 65535, AINEX,16, CALL, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:47:10, 000000, 00000, ff, 65535, ASERR, 16, CALL, WWW, 192.168.1.152, 0700000000, 12-03-04, 07:48:10, 000040, 00004, 00, 00008, BOK, 16, 222222222222222 first record contains a test call made from the IP address "192.168.1.152" to the phone number "0700000000". The

CALL wasn't made ("AINEX") because no route to destination was found; second record contains a test call from the address "192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The CALL was

not made because the direction called "SENDCALL" does not exist on the target ("ASERR"); the third record contains a test call from the address "192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The call was

made successfully ("BOK"); the called part has answered.

Note 1: The total number of digits from the number field that can be processed by "gwconfig" software is 16;

Note 2: the phone numbers, the identity and the IMSI values used in above examples are only for testing purposes;

Note 3: the code "WWW" it is used only for indicating the origin of the test call ("WWW"–from the Web);

TOPEX S.A. Page 76

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 77 TOPEX S.A.

Send a SMS alert

If the TOPEX gateway sends a SMS as an alert, the records will indicate this as follows:

- the first field, “Type”, is “SMS”, showing that a SMS message was sent - the second field, “Source”, is “ALARM”, to show that the SMS message was generated by an alarm - the IP address field will have the value “127.0.0.1”

CALLBACK records The SMS file also includes callback records, which describe callback actions to be performed by the TOPEX gateway when it receives a call from a registered subscriber.

|Below you have an example of callback records related to call-back actions:

CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000000, 13-04-04, 11:25:33, 000001, 00000, 00, 00008, AOK ,16, 226019451004927 CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000000, 13-04-04, 11:32:32, 000013, 00000, ff, 00008, BBUSY, 17, 226019451004927 CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000000, 13-04-04, 11:33:14, 000007, 00000, 00, 00008, BRELS, 16, 226019451004927 CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000000, 13-04-04, 11:36:07, 000001, 00000, 00, 00008, AOK , 16, 226019451004927 CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000000, 13-04-04, 11:40:22, 000012, 00000, 00, 00008, BBUSY, 17, 226019451004927 CALL, CBACK, 0700000000, 0700000001, 13-04-04, 12:03:40, 000001, 00000, 00, 00009, AOK , 16, 226019451004922

For each back call to be done, a record is generated into the SMS file. The callback table contains the following fields: "Identity", "Action", "Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo". A CALLBACK record contains the identity (in the above example it is the field "0700000000" - the identity is one of the "Identity" from the Callback table) and the number to be dialed in the callback action. The number to be dialed can be the same phone number as Identity or can be another one (if the field "Callback" is filled with another number, different from the identity number).

In the corresponding billing file will be saved the number dialed by the called party of the back call action.

If the "CallTo" field is filled in the callback table then that number will be saved in the billing file.

A SMS file has the following fields:

Field Description

Record type SMS or CALL (shows that the record is for a SMS respectively for a call, which may be a test call or a back call )

Source Port WWW (SMS or call sent from the Web), ALARM for calls or messages generated by alarms that occurred or CBACK for making back calls.

IP the IP address of the client from where the SMS was send or the CALL was launched (20 digits) or the identity pf the call in case of a CALLBACK record


SMS destination number or phone number for test calls (20 digits) or the number to be called in a CALLBACK record

Day and Time Date and Time of the call in the following format dd-mm-yy, hh:mm:ss (ending time)

Call Duration xxxxxx - duration of the call in seconds (6 digits). Is different from a zero value in case of a successful sending of a SMS or making a test call and indicates the amount of time from the moment of accepting the request to the moment of the successful ending;

Length xxxxx - the length of SMS message and the length of the option of CALL message (5 digits) or 00000 in case of a CALLBACK record


When the destination port is a mobile module it specifies a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or ff)

Destination Port

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits). When the call is not terminated a value of 65535 will be found in this field


Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT


Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values corresponding to ISDN standard for call release codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual By choosing "SMS" - tree command for a system, all SMS files from the folder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be seen.

You choose the SMS file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mouse button a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective display of the SMS information. This filter for SMS files allows setting the options and values for searching the records inside the SMS files.

3.9.4 Monitoring (activity) files The monitoring files are very detailed activity files, which record everything about the calls. They are generated to detail for you the mode of call setup and follow up for the calls from and towards the ports that have checked the field "Activity". The monitoring files are named <current date>.mon. For a call that is not routed there will be only two records. The calls that have been successfully routed feature four activity records each.

- First record includes the source port for the call, identity of the call, number dialed, destination port, - Second record include information about identity and call number received from the destination port based upon

the ignoring and inserting figure fields from the definition of the input direction. In the second record, the source and destination ports are reversed compared to the first record.

In the following examples you can see some test calls. 1.TLI, 00120, 120, 81712345678, 10-03-04, 14:30:43, 000004, 00001, 00, 00008, BOK , 16, 222222222222222, 17, abcd 2.IN, 00120, 3320, 0712345678, TD008, TSEL009, MODfe, 0001, ff 3.TJO, 00008, 3320, 0712345678, 10-03-04, 14:30:43, 000004, 00001, ff, 00120, BOK, 16, 4.OUT, 00008, TD008, TSEL009, MOD01, 0001, 00

Example 1 (with an answered call): contains a test call made from port "120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120". Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". The first line which is starting with "TLI, 00120" contains the original number and the original identity. The rules (regarding ignore and insert operations and the maximum expecting digits) which are defined in the section "Define Calls directions" are first applied to the number and to the identity. The line preceded by "IN, 00120" contains the modified number and the modified identity according to the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from "Define Calls directions" table.

The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits) and "Insert = '0'" (insert the digit '0') for the number, so the number was changed from "81712345678" to "0712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id = 1" (ignore one digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for the identity so the identity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rules for incoming part which are established in "Define Calls directions" table are applied, then the call is routed by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a record with "Prefix = 0" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore", "Ignore_id", "Insert" and "Insert_id" are not specified. The third and fourth lines represent the outgoing part of the call routed through a GSM port "00008". Caller ID sent through this port is "3320" and number is "0712345678".

Note 1: An incoming call can be made either from a subscriber or from an incoming direction (containing E1 trunks or mobile modules); Note 2: The fields that specify the modified number and the modified identity are the same in the second and in the third line ("0712345678" for the number and "3320" for the identity). Identity will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Define Calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Routing table" window. Number will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the "Define Calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the "Routing table" window; Note 3: The fourth line does not contain any information about the number and the identity; Note 4: The number and the identity can be also affected by the field "Max_d", and respectively by "Max_id" from the "Define Calls direction" window; Note 5: The total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig" software is 20 for identity field and for the number field; Note 6: In the billing files the number and the identity will not appear changed. Note 7: The number, the identity and the IMSI values that were used are only for testing purposes;

TOPEX S.A. Page 78

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 79 TOPEX S.A.

1. TLI, 00120, 120, 81712345678, 10-03-04, 14:30:43, 000004, 00001, 00, 00008, BOK, 16, 222222222222222, 17, abcd, GSM 2. IN, 00120, 3320, 0712345678, TD008, TSEL009, MODfe, 0001, ff 3. TJO, 00008, 3320, 0712345678, 10-03-04, 14:30:43, 000004, 00001, ff, 00120, BOK, 16, 17, 0000, 4. OUT, 00008, TD008, TSEL009, MOD01, 0001, 00 Example 2 (also with an answered call) contains a test call launched from port "120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120". Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". First line which is starting with "TLI, 00120" contains the original number and the original identity. The rules (regarding the ignore and insert operations and the maximum expecting digits) defined in the section "Define Calls directions" are first applied to the number and to the identity. The line preceded by "IN, 00120" contains the modified number and the modified identity according to the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from "Define Calls directions" table. The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits) and "Insert = '51'" (insert the digits '51') for the number, so the number was changed from "81712345678" to "51712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id = 1" (ignore one digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for the identity so the identity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rules established in "Define Calls directions" table are applied for the incoming call, the call is routed by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a record with "Prefix = 5" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore=2" (ignore two digits) and "Insert='0'" (insert the digit '0') (the fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" are not specified).The number "51712345678" will become "0712345678". The third and fourth line represents the outgoing part of the call routed through a GSM port "00008". Caller id sent through this port is "3320" and number is "0712345678".

TLI, 00120, 120, 81712345678, 10-03-04, 15:08:44, 000004, 00001, 00, 00008, AOK, 16, 222222222222222, 19, abcd, GSM IN, 00120, 3320, 0712345678, TD007, TSEL012, MODfe, 0000, ff TJO, 00008, 3320, 0712345678, 10-03-04, 15:08:44, 000005, 00001, ff, 00120, AOK, 16, 19, 0000 OUT, 00008, TD007, TSEL012, MOD01, 0000, 00 Note that there are two kinds of records: first record like in lines 1 and 3 from the previous examples and the second record like in lines 2 and 4 (containing “IN” and “OUT”).

The first record of the monitoring file includes the fields: Field Description

Call Type

Not terminated Incoming call: - MJI or MLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber) or Finished (answered) incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Not terminated Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber) or Finished (answered) outgoing call - TJO or TLO (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits)

Source identity subscriber number or source identity (20 digits). For outgoing records identity ("Ident") will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Define calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Routing table"window;


Call number (20 digits). For outgoing records identity ("Ident") will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore" and “Insert” from the windows “Call directions” and respectively " "Routing table"

Day and Time Day and Time of the call in the following format dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss Call Duration xxxxxx - duration of the call in seconds (6 digits) Billing Units for the call xxxxx - billing units for the call (5 digits)


When the destination port is a GSM port it specifies a value for the SIM card (0,1,2,3 or ff)

Destination Port - physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is not terminated a value of 65535 will be found in this field (5 digits)


Valid values are: AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT.


For non-ISDN calls the value in this field is ' 31' (normal call) For ISDN calls you will see the values corresponding to ISDN standard for call release codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (is filled for incoming records routed through a GSM port)

Selection Duration

Three digits, xxx – cumulated selection time, in seconds. The total time for selection and dial, the sum of the two values already existent in the monitoring files. It cumulates the values for “Dial time” (time in seconds for dialing the number) and “Selection time” (time in seconds while the response is waited for)

CELL The mobile (GSM) cell where the current SIM card is registered – a four character alphanumeric code. “Current” means the SIM, which is used for the call, which is “Destination SIM Number” on the “Destination Port”. The cell info is useful to learn which cells of the network have generated better ASR values.

Direction The direction to which the destination port belongs (it is the output direction)


TOPEX S.A. Page 80

The second record of the monitoring file includes these fields:

Field Description Call type IN (incoming call)

OUT (outgoing call) Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This is the destination port from

the preceding record

Source Identity Represents the source identity. For incoming records (preceded by "IN") the identity may be modified by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" established in the direction definition window and by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window. For records preceded by "OUT" this field is empty;


Number dialed (20 digits). For incoming records (preceded by "IN") the number to be dialed may be modified by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" also established in the directions definition and by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from "Routing table" window. For records preceded by "OUT" this field is also empty;

Dial time TDxxx - time in seconds for dialing

Selection time TSELxxx - time in seconds while the response is waiting

Call Type MODxx -specified call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). This field is used for further developments

Finalization mode Possible value are 0000-AOK, 0001-BOK, 0002-ARELS, 0003-BRELS, 0004-AINEX, 0005-BINEX, 0006-ACONG, 0007-BCONG, 0008-ASERR, 0009-BSERR, 000a-ANERR, 000b-BNERR, 000c-ANANS, 000d-BNANS, 000e-ABUSY, 000f-BBUSY, 0010-ATOUT, 0011-BTOUT (4 digits)

SIM information For calls routed to destination through a mobile module this represents the active SIM. Valid values are 0,1,2,3 or ff (xx- 2 digits)

For a call ended normally with an answer the file will have four records. Note: the activity records are processed before viewing into a simpler format by grouping two records (record 1 and 2) into a single one (chapter "ACTIVITY").

There is a filtering window that is similar to the “Billing” filter. In this window you can specify the following options: specify filtering from the point of view of the source of calls you have the following options:

physical position of the source port; port number (for a exchange subscriber call) or caller identity; direction (alls port on that direction will be searched); source port type: local subscriber or junction (outgoing trunk).

If in “Call Source” you check the box “Specify trunk value” a drop-down list show up, allowing you to select the destination direction (such as “LOCAL”) out of the list. The list contains the names of the directions already defined for the respective TOPEX system (“Directions Names”). Note: Please remember that for calls coming from E1 trunk and going out via mobile modules, the true identity of the caller cannot be sent (the GSM network does not allow this). The called party will receive only the ID of the SIM card from the TOPEX equipment that has been used to route the call. In case of calls that come from the GSM network, the true Caller ID can be sent to the called party via the E1 trunk.

Specify for the call destination (called part): digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records with the number of destination

digits less, greater or equal that the value typed; physical position of destination port; a direction (all destination port on that direction will be searched); a value for SIM card (0,1,2,3 or 255), when the destination port is a GSM port; a value for the IMSI code; a value for the CELL record, specifying the GSM cell.

Set “Destination Port Position”, check the box “Specify trunk value” and a drop-down list shows up, allowing you to select the destination direction (such as “LOCAL” ) out of the list. The list contains the names of the directions already defined for the respective TOPEX system (“Directions Names”). You just select from the list the direction and all destination ports on that direction will be searched.

Specify a filter on the finalization call mode (all calls and also the activity records have a caller and a called part). For an incoming call on E1 trunk the source part will be a channel on the trunk (physical port position will be 256 + channel number on E1 trunk) and the call will be routed over a GSM interface (the destination port). The physical port position on an E1 trunk is computed like this:

for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) the port will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number on E1 trunk.

TOPEX multiAccess

Caller part will be represented by 'A' and called part by 'B'. The finalization mode “call type” is detailed by one of the following strings:

ANSWER - (call answered, response in the destination part) RELEASE - (release) INEX - (non-existent from equipment point of view) CONG - (congestion from equipment point of view) SERR - (Signaling error) NERR - (Network error) NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone) BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation) TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)

Settings available for ISDN calls: also see the chapter “BILLING FILES”.

Set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represents the call release code for ISDN calls. For other types of calls a value of ' 31' will be displayed in billing records;

Select the records with the duration (in seconds) less, greater or equal then the value typed; Specify a value for the “Selection duration” (cumulative value for dial and selection time).

Certain values from the monitoring filter are checked against these limits before the validation (by pressing the button "OK"). The program verifies the correctness of the period definition (day and hour - day less or equal to 31, month less or equal to 12, year less or equal to 36, hour less or equal to 23, minute less or equal to 59 and second less or equal to 59), port position of the call source (in range 0 to 319) and the direction name to which call source port is belonging (an existent direction name), sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destination port position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319), duration and selection duration (a value greater or equal to zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal to zero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal to zero).

set the option “Report Definition” and define the columns to be displayed in the “Activity Report”. These columns will be detailed later in this chapter. The information concerning the activity columns to be displayed is stored in the file “mon_rep.dat” on the hard disk.

click the “Report Definition” button, a window shows up that allowing you to check the names of the columns that you want to be present in the activity report:

press "OK" button and all activity records which conform to the filter criteria will be shown.

All those records will be saved in "Viewer" folder for the chosen system in a file named "moni.tmp".

Note: The filters you have defined act only upon the recordings preceded by the characters 'M' and 'T'. If one of these recordings does not correspond to the selected criteria, automatically the second recording will be overlooked too. An activity record will contain the following fields:

Field Significance Not terminated Incoming call: - MJI or MLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber) or Finished incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber) Type (Call type) Not terminated Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber) or Finished outgoing call - TJO or TLO (the call source is a junction, respectively a local subscriber)

PortS (Source Port) xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits) Subscriber phone number or Caller Identity (20 digits). This field may be modified or not for outgoing records by the "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fields from "Define calls direction" and by the "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fields from "Routing table" window

Ident (Source Identity)

This field is filled only for incoming records and contains the changed source identity modified by "Ignore_id" and 'Insert_id" fields from directions definition window and by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window; In the previous picture you can see in the first record (an incoming call) in the field "Ident" the value "120" modified in the field "Ident changed" to "3320" (like in the examples);

Ident Changed (Source Identity Changed)

Page 81 TOPEX S.A.


Call Digits (Call Number)

Call number (20 digits). This field may be modified or not by "Ignore” and "Insert" fields from "Define calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from "Routing table" window on outgoing records)

CallDigits Changed(Call Number Modified)

This field is filled only for incoming calls and contains the changed call number which can be modified by "Ignore" and "Insert" fields from directions definition window and by "Ignore" and "Insert" by "Routing table" window; (16 digits) In the previous picture you can see on the first record (an incoming call) in the field "CallDigits" the value "81712345678" modified in the field "CallDigits changed" to "0712345678" (like in the examples);

Day and Time (Day and Time of the call)

Day and Time of the call in the following format : dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss

Duration (Duration of the call) xxxxxx - duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

Selection (total duration of the Dial and Selection phases)

Xxx – cumulated selection duration for the call, in seconds (3 digits). This is computed by adding the values “Dial time” and respectively “Selection time”

TUnits (Billing Units for the call) xxxxx - Billing Units for the call (5 digits)

SIM1 (Destination SIM Number)

When the destination port is a mobile port it specifies a value for the RUIM or SIM card (0,1,2,3 or ff) Physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is not terminated a value of 65535 will be found in this field (5 digits) PortD (Destination Port)

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT

End (Finalization call mode)

End 2 (Finalization call mode on ISDN calls)

Possible values are ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard for release codes

Dial (Dial time) xxx- dial time in seconds

Sel (Selection time) xxx- selection time in seconds xx- specifies call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). This field will be used for further purposes. Call (Call type)

SIM2 (Source SIM Number)

When the source port is a mobile port it specifies a value for the SIM or RUIM (0,1,2,3 or ff) International Mobile Subscriber Identity (is filled for incoming calls routed through a mobile port) IMSI

The cell of the mobile network (GSM or CDMA) where the active card (SIM or RUIM) is registered. CELL

Direction The direction to which the destination port belongs (this is the output direction)

Note 1: Several settings which are established for the monitoring filter are saved in the file "moni_fl.dat. The settings are: "Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriber side and junction side, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side") and "Call Type" ("ANSWER", "RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and "TIMEOUT"). Those settings are loaded before the display of the monitoring filter in order to be pre-established.

Note 2: On all fields (except "Type" field) a sorting operation can be performed. The sort operation is activated by clicking to the desired column. The first operation on a field is a sorting in ascending order. The indication will be the character "^" which is added to the column name. See below for the “Day and Time ” field:

A second click on the same field (column) will generate a sorting in descending (reverse) order. The indication will be the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column “Day and Time " is provided for both ascending and descending sorting. Please note that, depending of the number of records, the sorting operation may need a significant amount of time in order to perform.

TOPEX S.A. Page 82

TOPEX multiAccess

3.9.5 ASR files Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) is an important parameter because it is a very good indication of how well the equipment (in this case multiAccess) performs. ASR shows the relationship between the number of seizures that result in an answer signal and the total number of seizures. Thus, ASR is a direct measure of the effectiveness (how many of the attempted calls were completed) of the service performed. ASR is defined as the ratio between the number of “seizures” that result in an answer signal and the total number of seizures, in a specified period of time. In order to calculate the several ASR instant and average values the asr files store parameters such as number of answered calls, total number of calls, total connected time and total seized time. The ASR files are named <current date>.asr. The saving of the ASR values in files is determined by the parameter "Validate ASR reading". This parameter together with the time delay between saving can be edit by choosing icon option "Alerts" (" ") The lines of the ASR file are grouped two by two, one line contains general data (average and totals) and the next line instantaneous data. The general values are values cumulated since the beginning of saving the ASR data while the instantaneous values are the values stored at specified time periods.

Note: For a line of the file all values are calculated for the specified time period.

The fields of the ASR files are shown below: ASR value Average time (in seconds) Total number of calls Total number of answered calls Total number of calls from 'A' part (calling party) Total number of calls from 'B' part (called party) Total Seized Time (in seconds) Total Connected Time (in seconds)

select "ASR" - tree command for a system you cause all ASR (statistics) files from the folder "Alarms" of that system directory to be seen.

double click on the ASR file you want, then a dialog box will show up for making an ASR filter;

check options and values for searching inside the alarms directory into the filter ; set "Period" option to indicate by default the time interval which corresponds to the name of the selected ASR file.

This period could be changed in order to increase the time frame. The software searches for ASR files having assigned a name corresponding to this period.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the time periods (date). Before the validation of the "Asr Filter" the correctness of the period definition is checked (day less or equal to 31, month less or equal to 12 and year less or equal to 36). If you select an incorrect period an error message will be shown, such as “Wrong month”. In addition, the field in error will be colored in red, as shown below:

Page 83 TOPEX S.A.


You have the option to view ASR results (records) either in graphical mode or in text mode. For the text representation you may also set the option 'Only Total" for displaying only the total, not all the ASR records.

Note: Instantaneous values from the "ASR" files are used in the statistics representation. The statistics are done on hour periods. For a single day for "ASR" statistics and "Average Time" statistics, an additional average calculation is performed over an hour period if the number of recordings on that hour is greater than one. For calls and time statistics a SUM calculation is performed over an hour period if the number of recordings on that hour is greater than one. This method of calculation is extended in case of selecting more then a single day.

3.9.6 Viewer files The "Viewer" tree command allows you to view several files that are stored in the “Viewer" directory in the selected TOPEX system.

double click on that file and you will view the content

Ordinarily the files are viewed in text mode. There are several file extensions which are directly interpreted and viewed in a non-text mode. Those extensions are "tot" for billing records, "mes" for sms records and "moni.tmp" for activity records. For the files with those extensions the display mode is the same as for billing files, sms files and respectively activity files.

3.9.7 Log files

The events (log) files are named <current date>.log and contain information about the “events” that took place: date and time for the making and respectively breaking of connections concerning the selected TOPEX system, file transfer and so on.

If you access the “Log” menu from the arborescent structure you will see the list with correspondent “log” files:

Field Description Name <current date>.log Dimension in bytes Current date in the format dd/mm/yy Time of file generation in the format hh:mm

Description of the event: system connected or disconnected, files or directories downloaded from or uploaded to the TOPEX system. Event

Choose "Log" (tree command for a system), then all connections log (extension is *.log) files and changes log (extension is *.lch) files from the folder "Log" of the system directory will be seen. All these files are located in the folder "Log" of the root system directory.

The "log" files contain information indicating time and date of connection and disconnection related to the respective TOPEX system.

In this file there are saved all the operations regarding downloading and loading of files. There are specified directories: "bin", "cfg" or "out" from the remote gateway and the file name involved in the transfer operation. Also here are saved the ASR values and alarms gathered during automatic interrogation process.

3.9.8 Changes files The files with changes are named <current date>.lch and include information about the changes (modifications) performed on a remote TOPEX system. In the window displayed you may see recordings of changes performed: date and time of change, Rights modified for ports (access rights or category changed for those ports), Adding card (adding of a plug-in board), Deleting card (eliminating of a board from the system), Sim index modification (changes in the SIM index). Also, the file includes the result of the change: OK or ERROR.

The OAM application and also the remote gateway do validity checking for any change performed upon the system, the remote system may answer either by “OK” or with an ERROR message. You will get an error, for instance, when you try to allocate the same number to two different ports. The structure of the changes files is shown below:

Date of change dd-mm-yy Time of change hh:mm Modification Description of the change that was performed

OK - the change was successful Status ERROR - the change was NOT successfully

TOPEX S.A. Page 84

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 85 TOPEX S.A.

3.10 Commands description

3.10.1 SMS command Choosing "SMS" - tree command for a system, then all SMS files from the folder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be seen. Those files are used to keep information concerning sending SMS or making calls from the TOPEX gateway. The SMS files also include information about CALL-BACK actions to be performed.

select the SMS file you want to view / edit double clicking on it and a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective display of the SMS

information. set the options and values for searching records inside the SMS files specify the following options from the source point of view:

- IP of source; - Source value: (this value will be used in further developments); - Record type: SMS or CALL

Record source: WWW or CBACK (SMS or test call from the Web or call-back ring).

specify the following options for the call destination (called party) - Digits out of the destination digits. You can choose to select only records with the number of destination digits less, equal or greater then the value typed; - Physical position of destination port; - Value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255) when the destination port is a mobile module; - Value for IMSI code (International Mobile Station Identity).

specify a filter on the finalization call mode All calls and hence also the SMS records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1 trunk the

source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will be routed over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will be represented by 'A' letter and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Depending upon which the side ends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode will contain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS - RELEASE, INEX - INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS - NO ANSWER, BUSY - BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT.

specify the mode of ending call. "Call Type"

If you use the ISDN communication, additional, you must perform the following operations: set the value for "ISDN EndType" which represents call release code in case of ISDN calls. Other types of calls

will display a value of ' 31' in this field of the SMS records.

set the option to select the records with the duration (in seconds) less, equal or greater then the value you typed.

Note: The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the time periods (date and hour), 2 for the number of digits, 3 for the SIM index and ISDN_EndType, 5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 15 for the IP field, and 16 for IMSI code and 20 for specifying destination digits.

The program verifies the correctness of the period definition (day less or equal to 31, month less or equal to 12, year less or equal to 365, hour less or equal to 23, minute less or equal to 59 and second less or equal to 59), SIM index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destination port position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319), duration (a value greater or equal to zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal to zero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal to zero).

set the option ”Report Type” and choose the kind of report you want ("Display only the total without the records", "Display only the records without a total").

set the option "Report Definition" to define the columns to be displayed in the "SMS Report". The information regarding the SMS columns to be displayed is stored in the file "sms_rep.dat" on the hard disk in the same directory from where "gwconfig" software is running. In this file it is saved also the information regarding the size of the columns presented in the SMS report.

press "OK" button and all SMS records corresponding to the filter criteria will be seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from the selected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts (field "Att."), total number of connected (field "Conn.") and the percentage of successfully connections - (field "Per") and at the ending a total for all of the intervals - total number of attempts, total number of connected and the percentage of successful connections.

Note 1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer" subdirectory for the selected TOPEX system into a file with the "sms" extension and the name corresponding to the selected time interval.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual Note 2: several settings which are established in the SMS filter can be saved for further use. They will be saved in the configuration file "sms_fl.dat" on the hard disk in the directory where "gwconfig" software is running. Those settings are:” Record Type" (section "Call Source") - SMS or CALL, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER", "RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and "TIMEOUT") and the options regarding the viewing of totals of SMS records ("Display only the total without the records" and "Display only the records without a total"). Those settings are loaded before the displaying of the SMS filter in order to be pre-established.

Note 3: The program can perform a sorting operation upon all fields (except "Type" field). Clicking the column you want activates the sort operation. The first operation on a field is a sorting in ascending order. The indication will be the character "^" which is added to the column name. See below for the “Day and Time” field:

A second click on the same field (column) will generate a sorting in descending (reverse) order. The indication will be the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Ident" is provided for both ascending and descending sorting. Please note that, depending of the number of records, the sorting operation may need a significant amount of time to be performed.

3.10.2 Loading command The Loading command provides statistics about billing files. This allows the user to have data about each SIM, of all mobile modules and directions. By selecting "Loading" - tree command for a system, all billing files from the folder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be displayed.

select the billing file you want to analyze; set the options and values for highlighting records for "Display Statistics" filter of billing statistics; set "Period" to indicate the time period (by default the period corresponds to the name of the billing file that

you have selected). The program will look for records in the billing files whose name falls inside the selected time period;

set “Highlighting” option and specify the following parameters: - "ASR" (you may define a threshold: the default is an initial value of 70%); - "Average duration" (here also you may define a threshold; the default is a value of 120 seconds); - "Duration < 20 seconds" (a threshold can be defined; by default you have a value of 20 seconds for the lower limit of the calls);

select "OK" button, the statistics will appear as shown below:

In the above image you may see two panels which described: the upper one contains "Input" data and the lower one "Output" data.

TOPEX S.A. Page 86

TOPEX multiAccess Statistics are provided for each port, they include the following columns:

“Port", "Dir" (direction), "Type" (which may be GSM, SUBSCRIBER, BC, BL, EM, PABX, E1R2, ISDN, SS7 and R1), "SIM" (the number of the SIM card is filled only for GSM ports and on outgoing calls), "Attempts" (number of calls attempts), "Connected" (number of calls connected), "ASR", "Minutes" (number of minutes of conversation), "Duration" (average duration of the conversations) and "Duration<" (percentage of calls which have duration

below 20 seconds). Highlighting is done with red color and can appear on the columns: "ASR", "Duration" and "Duration<". The lists in the two panels are filled only with ports that have been active, that is from which or to which calls where made or routed. Each list contains at the bottom a total statistic and statistics over directions. For the “Output” area there are also shown statistics for each GSM call. By clicking on a record from the one of the lists an additional image will be provided, displaying graphically what happened to the calls: normal completion, release, errors.

The image contains three columns: first column from the left contains a statistic over calls (on that port, on a direction or on total): TOTAL number, "Completed", "Release", "Inex", "Cong", "Serr", "Nerr", "Nans", "Busy" and "Tout". The second column contains a statistic over calls ended from the "A" part and the last column a statistic over calls ended from "B" part.

3.11 Statistics description

3.11.1 ASR statistics

As you can see in the previous image the ASR value evolution is shown for the time interval from 00 hours to 23 hours. On the right side there are displayed ASR values for each time period. Note that during hours 4 to 8 there are no calls. The “Print” button at the bottom of the window allows you to print the graphic.

Page 87 TOPEX S.A.


3.11.2 Average time statistics

This statistic is about the mean time of calls. The above image shows for the 00-15 interval the evolution of the average values for the duration of the calls. On the right side there are displayed average time values for each period (in seconds).

3.11.3 Calls statistics

For the same time period you may see the evolution of number of total calls ("Total Calls"), total calls ending with response ("Connected"), total calls released from the calling party ("ARELS") and total calls released from the called party ("BRELS"). On the right side there are displayed those values for each hour period. Each type of values is coded with a specific color: blue = total, red = connected, and so on.

3.11.4 Total seized time and connected time statistics

TOPEX S.A. Page 88

In the image above you can observe for the 00-15 time period the evolution of values: total seized ("TIME") and connected time ("TIMECON"). In the right side there are shown the values in seconds for each hour period.

TOPEX multiAccess

Text representation – when selected, it displays all records from the ASR files as text only. As shown below, the records are grouped two by two, with general and instantaneous ASR values.

Lines preceding by character 'G' or 'I' show if the record is general or instantaneous; ASR value is following and after this follows "MT" characters, the average time of speaking (in seconds), record time, total number of calls ("CALLS"), total number of connected calls ("CONN"), total number of calling part release calls ("ARELS"), total number of called part release calls ("BRELS"). Next is total seized time ("TIME") and connected time ("TCON") both of them in seconds.

When more then one file is displayed a total is displayed for instantaneous records. For ASR and average time a medium is realized on number of records in hour period. For the other values a sum is provided.

There is at the end a total for instantaneous records and on hour periods: ASR and average time, number of calls and time values.

3.12 Password mode protection The "gwconfig" software includes a multiple (hierarchical) password protection implementation. This means that different categories of users (authenticated by passwords) may have different rights.

The “Password protection” mode is useful when several users are working with "gwconfig" software and certain actions on TOPEX gateway(s) must be performed carefully.

The implementation assumes that one user is the administrator of the "gwconfig" software, so the first step is to create such a privileged user.

The definition of the administrator is achieved by the option "Users definition".

If you go to password-protected mode without defining of an administrator, it won't work and an error message will show up.

Press the icon ("User definition") for defining an administrator;

Enter the initial password "TOPEX" in the access password window; enter the identification data for the administrator;

Add an user to the list, by selecting the button “Add”.

In case of the definition for the administrator the two possible “Rights” are already selected: both "Changes allowed" and "Transfer allowed".

For each new user two fields must be always filled: "Name" and "Password". An additional window is used to confirm name and password. Note: Only the administrator can perform actions over definition of users. He can add, edit and delete other users. There is a restriction that specifies that the administrator cannot be deleted. Once the definition of an administrator is done, the subsequent access to the icon "Users definition" will require administrator name and password:

� select the option ("Password mode") to enter into password-protected mode, it requires the administrator name and password.

Protected mode is indicated on the title bar of the "gwconfig" software by the words "protected mode" at the end. After protected mode is launched then another action on the icon "Password mode" will end this mode.

When protected mode is started then all subsequent access (connections) to the TOPEX system(s) will be protected by additionally requiring user identification.

A user without any of the two “rights” (changing and transferring of files) will be able only to connect to gateway(s) and see current status and settings. He will be without any possibility to change data and transfer files.

A user with the right to transfer files will be able moreover to transfer files from the TOPEX gateway but not to change the data.

Finally a user with all the rights will have full control of the TOPEX system(s), being able both to transfer files and to perform data changes.

Page 89 TOPEX S.A.


3.13 Connecting to a TOPEX multiAccess system If you connect for the first time to a TOPEX gateway, you must first add a new system to the tree-like structure. In the “Systems” menu click on Add. The following window will appear, asking you to add another TOPEX system to the arborescent structure.

“Directory” enter a name for the folder in which the file downloaded from the TOPEX E1/30 Mobile system will be stored

“Name” enter a name for the TOPEX system you want to add.

You have two exclusive options for the communication with the TOPEX multiAccess equipment: “Serial communication”

if this field is checked, the OAM program will communicate with the TOPEX system through the specified serial port. Serial Port num

number of the serial port of the computer through which the connection with the TOPEX system is achieved. IP communication

if this is checked, the OAM program will communicate with the TOPEX system via IP. You must select either serial or IP for communication! “IP address”

enter your IP address assigned to the system. “IP Port num”

you must enter the number of the port through which the communication with the system is achieved. The value is 9009. DialUp Connection

create a dial-up connection using the classic procedure (in case of IP communication allows this setting). The Dialup Connection must be created from Windows (from "Dial-Up Networking") and the connection name must not contain the character space inside the text.

Option “Use PPP address” is used to indicate to the “Gwconfig” application that it must connect to the address of the dialup server, after a successful connection. If this option is NOT checked, then the “Gwconfig” program will try to connect to the address specified in the field “IP address” located in the “IP communication” zone. Note: On the TOPEX multiAccess system there is a configuration file that specifies the IP addresses, so the IP address to connect to may be deferent from the one specified above. If the option “Use PPP address” is checked, upon achieving DialUp connection the TOPEX system automatically connects to the IP address from the dial-up server. If the “DialUp Connection” option is checked you may select a dialup connection from "DialUp connection name". You must enter a "DialUp Number" which overrides the number used at the creation of the Dialup Connection. Also by pressing "Edit" button you can override the "User" and "Password" used in the process of authentication.

You must note that if changes are made to "User" or "Password", fields, those changes will be also made in the Windows registry.

The field "Connection Timeout" is the time (in seconds) to wait from the moment of starting the DialUp connection to the obtaining of the connection state.

TOPEX S.A. Page 90

TOPEX multiAccess

A value check is performed upon the value for serial port. If the value you entered is not in the allowed range (1 to 12) an error message will be shown and the incorrect field will be colored in red. Value checks are also performed upon fields “Directory” and “Name”. If one value is not filled or you try to enter a name that already exists (is used for another TOPEX system) then an error message will be displayed and the incorrect field will be colored in red as shown in the following image:

Save – confirms the settings and adds to the arborescent structure a TOPEX system with the parameters you have specified Cancel – closes the window „Add system” Print – the print icon, located in the upper right corner of each window, allows you to print directly the image of the current window. This way, you may get very fast and easily a hardcopy of the current configuration window with a single click of the mouse.

follow the logging in procedure; enter your user name and password.

If the name and password correspond with one of the accounts defined on the local workstation, the OAM program will try downloading the configuration files. If the username and password do not match, you will get an error message.

The TOPEX multiAccess system begins the downloading. After the connection is successfully established the OAM program tries to download the configuration information as is shown bellow.

You will see a progress indicator for each of the configuration files downloaded, respectively: · File with information about the installed cards ("card.bin"); · File with information about the port settings ("port.bin"); . File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.bin"); · File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg"); · File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin"); · File with information about pin codes on GSM interfaces ("pin.cfg"); · File with information about loading on GSM interfaces ("loadsim.bin"); · File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces ("tmaxsim.bin"); · File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation to Least Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg"); · Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting and programming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg"); · File with information concerning the parameters used for communication between a TOPEX gateway and the "gwconfig" application, and the parameters used for debug purposes ("exec.cfg"); · File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg"); · Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC (circuit identification codes) allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files used in case of SS7 card presence; - Files used for VOIP-H323 configuration: "VoIP.cfg" and "h323.cfg".

Page 91 TOPEX S.A.


3.13.1 Error messages generated by the program 1. The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to the system. If it can’t connect at the third retry (fourth time) it will display an error message.

Thus, if in the authentication window the user name or the password are wrong, then the message „Authentication failed” will appear on the screen.

When you try to connect through IP and another user is connected to the equipment, the error message will appear on the screen: „Another user is connected”.

2. If the username and password do not match, you can try again to log-in. But after 4 (four) unsuccessful attempts to log-in you will receive an error message: “Password Authentication Retry Error”. You will NOT be able to see or to change the configuration of the system.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of the configuration files, it will display the following error message:

4. If during the downloading process or during the connection state the program encounters several consecutive communication errors, then the message "Passing LAPD Retry Error" will show up and the connection will be broken.

5. If the connection between the computer and the system is lost (in case of IP communication) an error message will be displayed with the text “Connection lost”.

Note1: If one multiAccess system is already connected, you can’t connect to another TOPEX system – only one connection at a time is permitted! Thus, the OAM software includes a protection against starting the program more than once.

If you need to start more than one instance of the program then you must use the following command for running the OAM software:

“gwconfig.exe –d” or “gwconfig.exe –D”

Note2: if another user is connected at the same time (using the “gwconfig” software from another PC), when you try to access the TOPEX gateway you will get an error message. This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to that gateway has already been accepted.

Note3: Remember that there are two types of windows used by the OAM program. There is one window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewing and changing the configuration (settings) of the TOPEX systems. When you work with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands from the tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mouse button you will be able to hide the window.

When you work (change or view) with a certain configuration, this configuration can be hidden using the right mouse button.

If the OAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clicking with the right mouse button you will make pop up a window with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

TOPEX S.A. Page 92

TOPEX multiAccess

3.13.2 Viewing and configuring the ports Once the configuration files are downloaded, in the right pane of the screen a “Modify Configuration” window will be displayed. You can view and change the current configuration (settings) of the equipment.

The window is divided into several distinct areas: Topmost, a menu bar with names "Systems", "Facilities", "About", "Help" and "Exit";

Underneath it, a toolbar with different command buttons with icons;

To the left, the tree-like structure of installed TOPEX gateways;

The right pane, blue, divided into the next areas:

- Port status: all the active ports are viewed (top);

- Trunk status: the channels of E1 trunk are viewed (middle);

- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed (bottom).

Only if a board with SS7 signaling card is present in the System, another area will show up in the panel: “Remote SP accessibility".

Types of boards:

S Analogue Subscriber board, 8 ports; G Mobile modules board, 2 ports; P PBX junctions board, 8 ports; E E&M junctions board 4, ports; B BL phones board, 8 ports; D E1R2 trunk card (32 channels / positions on an E1 interface); I E1ISDN trunk card for ISDN (32 channels); T E1SS7 card with SS7 signaling (32 channels); R E1R1 (32 channels); V VOIP card with SIP or H.323 protocol (8, 16, 32 or 64 voice channels).

In the upper corner, the flags for selecting the language. The available options are English, Romanian and French.

Page 93 TOPEX S.A.


3.13.3 Port status In the “Port Status” area, each column represents an analog board physically installed in the rack of the equipment. You can have maximum 16 boards and 128 ports. Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter (character) followed by a three-figure number. The letter is an identifier for the type of board – the boards with mobile modules feature the letter „G”, the subscriber boards “S”, etc. The three-digit number that follows the letter is the number of the port (the position for that port) Each rectangle also includes under the port value a short text corresponding to the direction name where the port is allocated. The length of this text string is limited to six characters. The GSM boards also include under the port number a two-figure number, which is the number of the active SIM card. Port representation is from right to left and on a specific board from top to bottom (positions on a card are from 0 to 7). The port number for GSM interface boards is computed as follows: the first GSM port is (number of board) x 8 + 0, while the second GSM port is (number of board) x 8 +1. Thus, for UABGSM board number 3 you will have the GSM ports G032 and G033. For boards with more than two ports you will have corresponding port numbers. For instance, for an analog subscriber board “S”, which features 8 ports, you will have ports from (number of board)x8+0 to (number of board)x8+7. The number of the board (from 0 to 15) is marked below and corresponds to the number of the slot n the equipment. When the user selects the icon "Status monitoring" in a connection state the port representation is changed. In It the connected state the color used to display each port is changed according to the port status: used port- white color, port in alarm - red color, invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" field not set or card error) and available port - dark blue. A detailed explanation will be shown later in this manual ("Status Monitoring").

Below you may see the case of a mobile module with a registered SIM (in the next example the active SIM card is the first SIM).

- example of a mobile module displayed in dark blue color, which is placed on direction "GSM". The active SIM card on the "032" module is "1". If the mobile module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) then after the port position and a line character it is also shown a value from 0 to 5 which describe the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position.

- example of a mobile module displayed in red color with the cause of error "2" – meaning "no physical SIM". Every port from each installed card can be individually configured by clicking on corresponding port. Depending on port type different parameters may be set:

Port type Category Direction Number Restriction Hunting Group

Pickup Group Target SIM

Index

S (Subscriber) YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (for "BC" settled) NO

G (GSM or CDMA) YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES P (PBX junction) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

E (E&M) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

B (Local battery) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO In the lowest part of the “Port Status” zone you will see the numbers for the 16 slots of the rack of the TOPEX equipment, into which you may add or remove boards. If the E1 cards used contain only one E1 interface per board, the interpretation is as follows:

- card 32 is located in the right side of the processor card (from the front panel of the equipment) - card 33 is placed in the left side of the processor card

The indication "SC" is used to highlight the signaling channels. To add a board in the current configuration of the TOPEX equipment, right click on an uninstalled card position (a light blue rectangle meaning empty slot). Then select “Add card x”, where x is the number of the slot that is available. On the screen will appear the window “Access Password”, where you must insert the “topex” password and press the “OK” button. The “Confirmation” window will appear with the message “Add card xx”. Press “OK” to add the new card or “Cancel” if you want to abort.

If you select “OK”, on the screen will appear the „Card Configuration” window where you will select the card type which will be added to the system.

Select the card type which will be added on the respective position (fro position 0 to 15). The available options are: Subscriber, GSM, Pabx, E-M, BL, ISDN-BRI and Radio.

Press the ”OK” button for validation or “Cancel” to abort the respective procedure and to close the window.

TOPEX S.A. Page 94

TOPEX multiAccess

3.13.4 Card configuration Select the type (for positions from 0 to 15) you want to install and then click “OK” to confirm. The types are:

Subscriber; GSM; PABX; BL (Local Battery); E&M ; IP (Voice over IP); RI (Radio Interface).

Select “Cancel” if you want to abort the procedure and close the window.

E1 CARD CONFIGURATION

If you select an E1 card, the options are:

• E1R2;

• ISDN;

• SS7;

• R1. E1 boards can be added on card positions 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7).

E1 CARD with R2 signaling

If you choose an E1R2 card, you must then select the adequate trunk settings (choosing a R1 card is similar) For each kind E1 there are some common settings that include: Clock

• "Synchronize Clock" - the clock is synchronized, generated according to the clock received (from the remote equipment connected to the TOPEX gateway).

• "Non Generate Clock" – allows or not the internal clock of the gateway to be generated by this trunk module. If the gateway contains more than one E1 trunk, by checking the "Non Generate Clock" you inhibit the generation of the local signalization signal from this E1 module.

CRC Options:

• "none" (does not use CRC);

• "Send MFAS" - send MultiFrame Alignment Sequence in the dedicated bits of channel 0 of the frame;

• "Send CRC" - calculate and send CRC4 check bits concerning the transmitted frame in the dedicated bits of channel 0 of the frame. Implies send MFAS;

• "Receive CRC" - calculate the CRC4 from the received frame and use the result for error monitoring of the received signal; implies send CRC4.

Example of setting "Synchronize Clock" and "Non Generate Clock" for two E1 trunks: 1) for the E1 module used as an external synchronization criteria the settings will be: enable "Synchronize Clock" and disable "Non Generate Clock".

2) for the E1 module not used as an external synchronization criteria the settings will be: disable "Synchronize Clock" and enable "Non Generate Clock".

3) in case you want the local synchronization signal to be generated independently from all of the external signal sources you need to disable "Synchronize Clock" on all E1 trunks and also disable "Non Generate Clock" for at least one E1 trunk.

Note: The bit clock of the E1 transmission on all E1 trunks of the TOPEX equipment is equal to the internal bit synchronization signal, regardless of the clock mode selected above.

Page 95 TOPEX S.A.


E1 card with ISDN signaling

If you select to add an E1ISDN card, you must set its specific options.

The options for ISDN are: • "ISDNUSER" • "ISDNNETWORK” • "QSIGUSER" • "QSIGNETWORK"

For E1ISDN trunk there are two additional values to be set: • "Signaling Terminal" - the signaling terminal to be

allocated for this trunk (values from 0 to 3; only the unused signaling terminals will be displayed in the list);

• "Signaling Channel" - this is the signaling channel to be used for the trunk (values from 1 to 31).

E1 CARD with SS7 signaling Selecting a E1SS7 card:

First you need to set the parameters in the "MTP Configuration" window (" "), for setting parameters of own and remote SP and in the "ISUP Configuration" window (" "), for setting the local port mapping of the Circuit Identification Codes (CIC).

For a "E1SS7" trunk an additional zone called "SS7 Parameters" can be defined. The values that can be set are "SLC" and "LinkSet".

SLC (Signaling Link Code) - it must be the same code on both ends of the signaling link.

LinkSet - this is an internal codification to associate an adjacent signaling point (zone "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)") in the "MTP Configuration" window (" ").

To add a new VoIP card in the structure of the TOPEX multiAccess gateway press the mouse right button on the 32 position.

Then fill in the field “RTP start”. This is the number of the port from where the allocation of ports starts. For each voice channel of the VoIP card, two ports must be assigned: one for control (RTCP) and one for transport of packetized voice. Both RTP and RCTP run on top of UDP transport protocol.

The “Start” port information is required for firewalls, to allow access on a range of ports.

To compute the range of VoIP ports:

for a VoIP card installed on position 32, the ports used are: RTP Start + 256 + 2 x Nchan (voice transfer ports alternate with ports used for control), that is the port number starts with RTP Start + 256 +2 and ends with RTP Start + 256 +2 x 64 in case of 64 compressed voice channels.

for a VoIP card installed on position 16, the ports used are: RTP Start + 128 + 2 x Nchan

The default values are: for "RTP start" - 10000 and for "Range" - 64.The VoIP protocol type (H323 or SIP) will be selected in the “VoIP Configuration” Window.

TOPEX S.A. Page 96

TOPEX multiAccess To delete (remove) a card from the current configuration right click a port of that board and select from the menu that shows up the option “Remove card x” where x is the number of the slot in where that board is installed. Of course, you must click on a position with installed card (dark blue rectangle). Select the lower option, “Remove card x”, to delete a board from the TOPEX system.

Again, you will be asked for password. In the dialog window “Access password” enter the password “topex” and select OK to continue. The confirmation window shows up next, similar to the one for adding a board to the system:

Select “OK” to confirm the deletion of the board from the system “Cancel” if you don’t want it to be eliminated.

After deleting a board from the system the corresponding rectangle will be colored light blue, meaning that slot is now available (free) and you can install another board into that slot.

Page 97 TOPEX S.A.


3.14 Configuring the installed boards After you have finished installing the different cards into the TOPEX gateway, you can configure the cards and their ports according to your needs. For each type of gateway port, the settings are made by clicking on it with the left mouse button.

3.14.1 Configuring the subscriber board – FxS card – S available for multiAccess / Qutex

Click on the port of the subscriber board and the

windows with the port settings will appear, as shown below; Specify the operating parameters for each port.

Installed - allows the activation of the port. If that option is not selected it means the port cannot make calls or receive calls. DTMF - allows the dialing of the numbering in the tone (DTMF) mode, if not checked the dialing will be performed in pulse mode. Can make calls - that port can make calls.

Monitoring - the system sends to the OAM program detailed monitoring information about the selected port. Direction - the direction to which this port was assigned. Direction must be one of the directions specified in "Define directions names". For an unallocated direction a value of 255 must be entered. Number - the call number for that port, meaning the number one must dial in order to call that port (it can be up to eight digits long). An unallocated number will be typed in the following format "---". Restriction - the number of the restrictions class. It can be a number from 0 to 19. Within each class of restrictions you may define the numberings that are restricted.

Hunting G. - the number of the hunting group to which the port is assigned. This also can be a number from 0 to 19. If the port is not assigned to any group of hunting you must enter 255. Pick G. - the number of the pick-up group to which the port is assigned. Valid values are numbers from 0 to 19. If the port is not allotted to any pick-up group you must enter the value 255. BC - if you check the BC check box you may enter in the Target field a destination position to which the port will call directly when the receiver is lifted off the hook. If you don't want to enter any number you may enter "---" Second Category - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments. Note 1: several fields have length limits: for number the limit is 8, for target is 3 and for second category is 8.

Note 2: for the number and for the target field verifications are performed: for number (digits entered can be values from 0 to 9 or characters "---") and for target a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". When you insert a wrong value into one of these fields an error message is displayed as shown.

The field in error is colored in red, while the text becomes white. The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire board (all of the ports of that subscriber card). Those changes will be applied "Category", "Direction", "Restriction", "Hunting Group", "Pick Group." and "Target" - you check the boxes for the ones you want. Remember, in order to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

TOPEX S.A. Page 98

TOPEX multiAccess

3.14.2 Configuring the mobile modules card - G available for multiAccess / Qutex Click on the port of mobile (CDMA or GSM / HSDPA) board and the window with the port settings will appear, as shown below. The window “GSM Settings Port xx” is the same for the CDMA and GSM networks:

The “Category” area contains the following items:

Installed – allow activation of that port; if that option is not selected it means the port cannot make calls or receive calls;

IN – input, port used only for incoming calls; OUT – output, port used only for outgoing calls; DISA – activates the DISA service on that port; Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files.

“Direction” – the direction to which this port has been assigned. “Direction” must be one of the directions specified in “Define directions names”. It can be a number from 0 to 19. If the port number is not assigned to any direction, then enter 255.

“SIM index” – an index (0-7) from the allocation table of the SIM cards that instructs the port what SIM to use. The list contains values from 0 to 7 and the 255 value to indicate an unallocated index.

“Target” – the number of the local extension to which the input junction should ring. If you enter “---” the calls that come in through this port will ring continuously. “Second Category” - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments.

The “Saving Options” area is identically to the one for the Subscriber boards, you may select what changes apply to all ports.

This zone of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire GSM board (all of the GSM ports of that card). Those changes are for "Category", "Direction", and Sim index” and “Target” - you check the boxes for the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value as an option for the entire board, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

Page 99 TOPEX S.A.


“SIM area” (this area is situated on the bottom side of GSM configuration card)

The settings in this zone are about SIM cards: their PIN code, the loading for each SIM and the maximum time of usage for each SIM:

Pin Code 1 - PIN code of the SIM no. 1 (4 digits); IM no. 2 (4 digits); Pin Code 3 - PIN code of th Pin Code 2 - PIN code of the Se SIM no. 3 (4 digits); Pin Code 4 - PIN code of the SIM no. 4 (4 digits). When option "Apply changes for entire direction" is set then the values for all four PIN codes are send to all GSM ports that are allocated on the same direction.

Load Sim 1 - loading in seconds (minutes) for SIM no 1; Load Sim 2 - loading in seconds (minutes) for SIM no 2; Load Sim 3 - loading in seconds (minutes) for SIM no 3; Load Sim 4 - loading in seconds (minutes) for SIM no 4.

You can reset each loading value by clicking the "Reset" button to the right of the “Load Sim” field; when option "Apply changes for entire direction" is set then a reset of a loading on a Sim x (x=1,2,3,4) will be send for Sim x on all GSM ports which are allocated on the same direction. In case of "load balancing algorithm" the next set of values are useful.

The next values are useful because each of them is establishing a maximum value of using time for a SIM; after the specified value the SIM will become blocked. If the actual values get over the Max value then the SIM becomes blocked. Max SIM1 - maximum time to use in seconds (minutes) for first SIM; Max SIM2 - maximum time to use in seconds (minutes) for second SIM; Max SIM3 - maximum time to use in seconds (minutes) for third SIM; Max SIM4 - maximum time to use in seconds (minutes) for fourth SIM.

You can set each value by clicking the "Set" button to the right of the “Max 1…4” field. Here also, when option "Apply changes for entire direction" is selected, then a set of a maximum time on a Sim x (x=1, 2, 3, 4) will be send for Sim x on all GSM ports which are allocated on the same direction.

Apply changes for the entire direction - if it is selected, the values for PIN code, loading (Load) and maximum time (Max) will be automatically applied to all the mobile modules for that direction.

Save – saves the changes you performed;

Cancel – cancel the changes, closes the window without saving;

Help - shows a help window with help information about configuring the GSM board (this paragraph of the Operating Manual in online electronic format).

Refresh - if this option is selected, then the OAM software will request the current values for SIM loading from the gateway.

TChange - speaking time period in seconds following which the active SIM is changed (the gateway looks for the SIM card with the lowest load for the same GSM module). Usual values are 1800 or 3600 seconds. This parameter is the same for all GSM modules and can be viewed and changed in any GSM settings window. This parameter can be changed by using the "Set" button. Another command which is changing the same parameter is the command "set tchange xxx" - command which can be completed by choosing "Facilities - Commands".

Note1: The difference between GSM/UMTS modules and the CDMA modules is the special option DIRMODULECDMA allocated to the CDMA direction. Note 2: Several of the fields have length limits: for target is 3, for second category is 8 and for pin codes it is 4. Note 3: Also, verifications are performed for the fields PIN codes and target. For PIN codes digits can have values from 0 to 9 or characters "---" and for target it may be a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". If a bad value is inserted an error message is shown and the specified field turns red.

TOPEX S.A. Page 100

TOPEX multiAccess

3.14.3 Testing the mobile modules board You may test the installed mobile interface boards (for GSM or CDMA networks) by means of the software application “gwconfig”.

This option is used to test both mobile interfaces from a board. In order to test a mobile interface board, the two mobile ports of the respective card must be uninstalled.

The program uninstalls the board automatically, but you can also un-install it manually. This is done by un-marking the option “Installed” from the section “Categories”.

The un-installing can be done only once, then you may perform the board test as many times as you want on the same board position.

After you finish testing the boards, you must install them again, to be able to use the TOPEX gateway. When the program uninstalls the modules automatically, there is a delay until the application starts the procedure of interrogating the mobile modules. The maximum delay is of 30 seconds (see details further on).

Go to the “Port Status” area;

Right click the mobile (GSM or CDMA) board you want to test. See below an example of TOPEX gateway with Mobile modules. You will see several options, as shown in the following image. In order to interrogate the mobile interface, select “Test GSM card”:

The test window “GSM CARD ANALYSIS” will show up, as shown next:

You notice the two sections, “GSM0” and “GSM1”, for the two GSM ports of the mobile (GSM) interface. Each section includes information about the ordinal number of the port (in the above figure, 56 and respectively 57). The other cases will be filled only after the launching of the (command “Start”). To begin the testing, issue the command “Start” by clicking the button Start. The application starts testing the first mobile module of the board, GSM0”. Note: Since the program performs automated un-installation of modules prior to their testing, there will be a time interval from the moment you press “Start” button until the refreshed information is displayed onscreen. This delay is needed by the software application in order to perform interrogation of mobile modules. You’ll have to wait at most 30 seconds.

Page 101 TOPEX S.A.


Each mobile module will go through these phases:

a) It is monitoring. This supervision refers to the fact that the software application is allowed to communicate directly with the monitoring mobile module. This is precisely what pressing “Start” button does – it begins the monitoring for the respective mobile module.

b) The normal monitoring of the module is indicated by the message “MONI OK” shown on white background in the box located to the right of the port position (no 56 in our example). Another answer may be the word “Timeout” shown on a red background. This indicates that no communication was established between the module and the application inside the timeout delay (preset at about 30 seconds). In this case you must click again the “Start” button to launch once more the test.

c) After the module is set to the supervised state, comes the scanning of the four SIM cards in order to find out about their status (if it is present or not). For each SIM that is found to be present, interrogation will follow about its state of registration in a mobile network. Other data requested are: IMSI code of the respective SIM and mobile operator where the SIM card was registered.

Upon first cycle (when the application tries to find out information about the SIM on first position) there will be interrogated also: Manufacturer of the mobile module; Model (type of device); Revision (name, number and date of issue); IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity).This 15-digit number is a unique identifier allocated to each mobile

equipment (mobile phone, module, etc). It consists of a TAC (Type Approval Code), a FAC (Final Assembly Code), SNR (Serial Number) and a Spare Digit. The IMEI code is device-related, while IMSI code (see further on) is SIM card related.

The next image shows an example, where mobile modules are identified, but no SIM cards are present:

d) Situations that are identified – successive stages:

d1) Transition from one SIM to another – column “AT-SIM” The program issues an AT-type command that allows going from a SIM position to the next one. In case of confirmed (successful) switching the message “SIM OK” will be shown on a white background. If the timeout period has expired and switching from one SIM position to another is not confirmed, a “Timeout” message will be shown on a red background. This warning means you must start again the test; d2) Presence indication – column PRESENCE No SIM card on one or several of the positions SIM1, SIM2, SIM3 and SIM4. The absence of SIM card is indicated

by the message “ERROR” and by the fact that the color of the background of the case “PRESENCE” turns from white to red. In the example above the passage from one position to another was successful, but no SIM cards were found, hence all the “PRESENCE” boxes show the text “Error” on red background. If a SIM has not answered inside the preset time interval (this is unlikely, it can seldom happen), the message “Timeout” will be displayed on a red background. When a SIM card is not present or does not answer on time, no further interrogations are performed. This means you will not see the other information, which is the state of registration, the IMSI and the mobile operator.

SIM present – the presence of a SIM card on the respective position is indicated by the message “READY” written on a white background. The interrogation process continues with the interrogation of the registration status of that SIM.

SIM present, but PIN code is requested – the option “Request PIN” has been enabled for that SIM card. The box “PRESENCE” will display the text “SIM PIN” on a white background. The PIN code is supplied automatically by the software application. The PIN code is found in the GSM Settings window for the respective mobile module. The interrogation process continues next with the interrogation of the state of registration of the SIM card.

SIM present, but PUK code is requested. This is indicated by the message “SIM PUK” that is displayed on a red background. The process of interrogating the respective SIM ends here.

TOPEX S.A. Page 102

TOPEX multiAccess

d3) Registration indication – column REGISTRATION STATUS “registered” – the SIM card is registered on the network; the text “registered” will show on a white background; “not registered, not trying” – the SIM card is NOT registered and it does not even try to register. This warning is

shown on a red background; “not registered, trying” – the SIM is not actually registered but it is trying. Indicates that the SIM is currently

searching a new operator to register on it. This warning is shown on a red background. It is possible that the field strength (RF signal) is too low or the antenna is not connected properly;

“registration denied” - registration of the SIM is forbidden; This error is shown on a red background; “unknown” - unknown; Also shown on a red background; "registered, roaming"– The SIM card is registered and also has roaming facilities; The text is displayed on a white

background; Normally, you should NOT use for your TOPEX gateway SIM cards with the roaming feature enabled d4) IMSI code – column IMSI this is the “International Mobile Station Identity” code that uniquely identifies each SIM card.

The IMSI code is 15 digits long and includes information about mobile country code, mobile network code and mobile station (subscriber) identification number. While the IMEI is related to the mobile phone or module, the IMSI is related to the SIM, so you will have a different IMSI code for each active SIM card. The value of the IMSI code is shown upon a white background. In case of error, when the IMSI code is the same with the IMSI code from another SIM card from the same mobile module, the respective values will indicate warning by means of a red background; the IMSI code is requested only if a SIM card has been found on the respective position

d5) operator – column OPERATOR identifying the mobile operator (provider). It may be the name of the operator or his network code (in the example

above you can see the Romanian operator “CONNEX GSM”). The operator is requested only if the SIM card on the respective position is properly registered on the mobile network.

d6) Rec Level Cell ID The sixth and last column indicates the reception level (signal strength, in dBm) and the current cell for the mobile operator. Note: The manufacturer of the respective mobile module, the model (type) and the revision of the wireless module are shown above, near the port number, because they are specific for the respective module. The other information (SIM presence, registration, IMSI, operator, rec level and cell ID) is specific to each SIM, so you will have four rows with different values (if four active SIM cards are used on that module).

e) When all the tests are finished, the message box "The test is ended" shows up in the center of the screen. This indicates that the tests are finished for the respective GSM board.

3.14.4 Configuring the PBX junctions board – FxO card P available for multiAccess / Qutex To configure one of the ports from the PBX junction boards click on that port to enter the window for PBX settings as shown below:

Click on the port of PBX junctions board to enter the window for PABX ports setting port as shown below:

Installed - allows activation of that port; if that option is not selected the port cannot make calls or receive calls.

IN - input, port used only for incoming calls

OUT - output, port used only for outgoing calls

DISA - activates the DISA service on this port

DTMF - allows dialing the numbering in Tone (DTMF) mode

Monitoring - the system sends to the OAM program more detailed monitoring information for that port

Direction - the direction to which this port was assigned. Direction must be one of the directions specified in "Define directions names". If the port is not assigned to any direction, then enter 255.

Target - the port position of the local extension to which the input junction should ring. If you enter "---" the calls that come in through this port will ring continuously.

Second Category - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments.

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when you need to make changes for the entire board (all of the ports of that PBX card). Those changes are for "Category", "Direction" and "Target" - you check the boxes for ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected. Note1: Here also several fields have length limits: for target the limit is 3 and for second category is 8. Note2: Verification is performed for the target field: it must be a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". A message error is shown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Page 103 TOPEX S.A.


3.14.5 Configuring the E&M board - E available for multiAccess / Qutex Click on the port of E&M junction board and the settings that must be performed will be displayed as follow:

Installed - allows activation of that port.

IN - input, port used only for incoming calls OUT - output, port used only for outgoing calls

TAX IN - signaling with billing on the input TAX OUT - signaling with billing on the output Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files

Direction - the direction to which this port was assigned. Direction must be one of the directions specified in "Define directions names". If the E&M port is not assigned to any direction, then enter 255.


Second Category - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port.

You need not enter the 8-digit value by hand, click the “…” small button located to the right of the field “Second category” and a window called “Computing Second Category” will show up.

In this window you simply check (mark) the options you want to use:

The first zone refers to the allocation of PCM channels. The multiAccess equipment features two simultaneous E1 trunks, hence 64 PCM channels, while the total number of ports can be 128. This means a concentration of 1:2, the channels are allocated dynamically. The settings of the first zone in “Second category” allow you to change this default allocation:

Allocate Channel – Eurocontrol communications (standard for air traffic control in Europe) requires a channel allocated all the time to the respective port. Use this option to force static (permanent channel allocation).

Allocate 2280 receiver – also for Eurocontrol, allows detection of engaging for the 2280 receiver

TOPEX S.A. Page 104

TOPEX multiAccess

Refresh Channel – updates the allocation of the PCM channels to the ports. If you add or change a board in the configuration of the system, the channel allocation is also modified. Use this option to update the allocation information.

SideA/SideB (Eurocontrol) – also for Eurocontrol: establishes if the equipment is type “Side A” or “Side B”, by setting the duration of the “engaged” tone.

In the JONSUBTYPE area you can select the subtype of the junction. The options are “radio buttons”, mutually exclusive (only one option may be selected at a time). The default value is “R2”, which means generic R2 signaling. More detailed options are: R2 (Q411, Q421 R2), DTMF (Q411, Q421 DTMF), R2 Eurocontrol, DTMF Eurocontrol, QR1 Pulse, QR1 Tone, QR1 DTMF, E&M Radio.

The “QR1” options refer to the R1.5 signaling protocol, used in the ex-Soviet Union countries. Dialing may be performed in pulse mode, DTMF mode or R1.5 tone mode, which also use dual tones, but is different from the standard DTMF selection of phone numbers.

Press “OK “ to confirm, “Cancel” to abort or “Help” to get help about configuring the E&M boards.

Note1: several fields have text length limits: for target is three and for second category is eight.

Note2: for the target field verification is performed: a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". A error message is shown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

3.14.6 Configuring the BL (Local Battery) phone board B available for multiAccess / Qutex Click on the port of Local Battery board and the settings that must be done will be displayed: Installed - allows activation of that port. If the case is not checked, that port cannot make or receive calls.

Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files.

Direction - the direction to which this port was assigned. Direction must be one of the directions specified in "Define directions names". If that port is not allotted to any direction you must enter the value 255.

Number - the call number for that port, meaning the number one must dial in order to call that port (it can be up to eight digits long). An unallocated number will be typed in the following format "---".

Restriction - the number of the restrictions class. It can be a number from 0 to 19. Within each class of restrictions you may define the numberings that are restricted.

Target- destination port position that the source port will call directly when he activates a call. If you don't want to enter any port you may enter "---".

Second Category - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used for further developments.

Saving Options - this zone of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire board (all of the ports of the BL card). Those changes are for "Category", "Direction", "Restriction" and "Target" - you check the boxes for the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire BL card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

Note1: Several fields have length limits: for number is eight, for target is three and for second category is eight.

Note2: For the number and for the target field verifications are performed: for number (digits can be values from 0 to 9 or characters "---") and for target a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". If you inserted a bad value into the specified fields an error message will be displayed.

Page 105 TOPEX S.A.


3.14.7 Configuring the radio board – RG To configure a port of the radio board click on that port and the window with the port settings will appear as shown below:

On the upper part of the “Radio Settings” window are located two sections named „Category” and „Radio Type”.

Category: contains the options: - Installed - allows activation of that port; - IN - input, port used only for incoming calls; - OUT - output, port used only for outgoing

calls; - Monitoring - the system collects additional

information for this port in activity (monitoring) files.

Radio Type - analogue station or digital station (Tetra or Tetrapol);

Direction - the direction to which the port is belonging. The direction can be selected from the list which contains all the directions specified in "Define directions names". The value "255" indicates an unallocated direction.


Second Category - a 8 digits category which can be assigned to the specified port. By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Second Category" field will appear:

Allocate channel - must be set;

Serial Speed - this field is valid just for Tetra and Tetrapol stations. Values for this field are: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200;

Channel - this field is valid for analogue stations - the values for this field are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.

TOPEX S.A. Page 106

TOPEX multiAccess

Configuring a radio station – set the bellow parameters for this operation

Radio Type - the type of the radio station: Analogue, Tetra or Tetrapol

Name - represents the name used to identify the radio station. By default it is equal with the physical port position (0016 for port 16).

Serial Speed - this field is valid just for Tetra and Tetrapol stations. Values for this field are: 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600 and 115200.

Timechannelscan - represents the time interval for scanning

Timechannellock - represents the time interval for locking

Group - group of radio stations (is an integer). When activity is detected on a channel belonging to a group of channels - the application will not transmit on any other channel which belongs to the same group

Active channel - is used just for analogue stations - to indicate the channel (from 1 to 6) to be used by default at reset.

Channel 1 to 6- indicates the number of the channel

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire card (all of the ports of that card). Those changes are for "Category", "Direction" and "Target" - you check the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

Note 1: several fields have text length limits: for target is 3 and for second category is 8.

Note 2: for the target field verification is made: a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". A message error is shown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Page 107 TOPEX S.A.


3.14.8 Configuring the ISDN - BRI board – NT or TE Click on the port of ISDN-BRI board and the settings that must be done will be displayed:

At the top of the window is located the “Category” section which contains the following options: - NT/TE - type of the ISDN-BRI interface.

Depending of the interface type some of the following settings are displayed or hidden;

- Installed - allows activation of that port; - Can make calls - that port can make calls; - IN (for TE case) – input, port used only for

the input calls; - OUT (for TE case) – output, port used only

for the output calls; - DISA (for TE case) – activates the DISA

service on this port; - Monitoring – the system collects additional

information for this port in activity (monitoring) files.


First Number (for NT case)- the first call number for the port (it can be up to eight figures long). An unallocated number will be put in the following format "---".

Second Number (for NT case)- the second call number for the port (it can be up to eight figures long). An unallocated number will be put in the following format "---".

Restriction (for NT case) - the number of the restrictions class. It can be a number from 0 to 19 (there is a list which contains all values from 0 to 19). Within each class of restrictions you may define the numberings that are restricted.

Hunting G. (for NT case) - the number of the hunting group to which the port is assigned. This value can be selected from the list which contains values from 0 to 19; or the value 255 to indicate that the port is not assigned to a group of hunting.

Pick G. (for NT case) - the number of the pick-up group to which the port is assigned. This value can be selected from the list which contains values from 0 to 19 and the value 255 to indicate that the port is not assigned to a group of pickup.

Target (for TE case) - destination port position which the source port will call directly when he activates a call. If you don't want to enter any port you may put "---"

Second Category - a 8 digits category which can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments.

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire card (all of the ports of that card). Those changes are for "Category", "Direction", "Restriction" and "Target" - you check the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

Note1: several fields have text length limits: for numbers is 8, for target is 3 and for second category is 8. Note2: for the number and for the target field verifications are made: for number (digits can be values from 0 to 9 or characters "---") and for target a number from 0 to 127 or characters "---". A message error is shown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

TOPEX S.A. Page 108

TOPEX multiAccess

3.15 Configuring the channels of TOPEX multiAccess

3.15.1 Configuring the E1R2 channels Click on the port of the E1 board with R2 signaling to change the settings: Installed - allows activation of that port. IN - input, port used only for incoming calls OUT - output, port used only for outgoing calls TAX IN - signaling with billing on the input TAX OUT - signaling with billing on the output Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files


Second Category - a 8 digits category which can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments.

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire card (all of the ports of that card). Those changes are for "Category" and "Direction"- you check the ones you want. Also, for setting a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected. Changes are not sending automatically to the channel 0 and 16.

"E1 Trunk Details" - this zone contains the current settings regarding the clock generation ("Synchronize Clock" and "Non Generate Clock") and the using of the CRC ("none", "Send MFAS", "Send CRC" and "Receive CRC"). Note1: the field for second category has a maximum 8 length.

Page 109 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual 3.15.2 Configuring the E1 ISDN channels

If the E1 trunk is used with digital subscriber lines (ISDN) you will use the window described below to configure the operating parameters. The title of the window shows the ISDN interface type: ISDN USER or ISDN NETWORK, QSIG USER or QSIG NETWORK. Select ISDN NETWORK and the following settings will show up: Installed - allows activation of that port.

IN - input, port used for incoming calls OUT - output, port used for outgoing calls

Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files

Direction - the direction to which this port has been assigned, for example “ISDN”. Direction must be one of the directions specified in "Define directions names". If the port is not assigned to any direction, then enter 255.

Saving Options - useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire E1ISDN board (all of the ports on that card). Those changes are for "Category" and "Direction"- you check the boxes for the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected. \note that changes are not sent automatically to the channel 0 and 16 of the E1 trunk.

Second Category - a category (8 digits) that can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments.

E1 Trunk Details" - this zone contains the current settings of E1 trunk concerning clock generation and usage of CRC. Clock options are "Synchronize Clock" and "Non Generate Clock" while options related to CRC are "none”, “Send MFAS", "Send CRC" and "Receive CRC". For E1 ISDN trunk two additional values can be set: "Signaling Terminal" - this is the signaling terminal to be allocated for this trunk (allowed values are from 0 to 3;

only the unused signaling terminals will be displayed in the list); "Signaling Channel" - this is the signaling channel to be used for the trunk (allowed values are from 1 to 31).

Note1: here also the field ”second category” has a maximum allowed length of eight.

TOPEX S.A. Page 110

TOPEX multiAccess

3.15.3 Configuring the E1 SS7 channels The SS7 channel can be configured as "Signaling Channel" - when "Signaling Terminal" and "LinkSet - SLC" values are allowed to be changed or without "Signaling Channel" option - case in which the port can be configured with "Category", "Direction" fields.

For "Signaling Channel" enabled: for "Signaling Terminal" (values from 0 to 3) only the unused and current signaling terminals will be displayed in the list. LinkSet and SLC values are selected from a list in which the first digit is the "LinkSet" (in range 0-3) and the other digit is "SLC" (in range 0-f). The LinkSet-SLC pair is unique for each signaling terminal.

Installed - allows activation of that port;

IN - input, port used only for incoming calls;

OUT - output, port used only for outgoing calls;

TAX IN - signaling with billing on the input;

TAX OUT - signaling with billing on the output;

Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files;

Direction - the direction to which the port is belonging. The direction can be selected from the list which contains all the directions specified in "Define directions names". The value "255" indicates an unallocated direction;

Second Category - a 8 digits category which can be assigned to the specified port. This value will be used in further developments;

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire card (all of the ports of that card). Those changes are for "Category" and "Direction"- you check the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected. Changes are not sending automatically to the channel 0 and 16, which are for control and data.

The buttons "Block" and "Unblock" are used to send block and unblock message to the remote equipment, on the selected channel. If the option "Apply settings for all positions on card" is selected the command for block / unblock will be sent to all voice channels of the E1SS7 card (without channels 0 and 16).

The buttons "Loop" and "Unloop" are used to loop and unloop channels. If the option "Apply settings for all positions on card" is selected the command for loop / unloop will be also sent to all channels (without channel 0 and the signaling channel).

Note1: The field for second category has a maximum length of eight.

Note2: The channel 16 may be also used for voice.

E1 Trunk Details" - this zone contains the current settings concerning clock generation and usage of CRC. Clock options are "Synchronize Clock" and "Non Generate Clock" while options related to CRC are "none”, “Send MFAS”, “Send CRC" and "Receive CRC".

You can also select here options for the signaling terminal, signaling channel, SLC and LinkSet to be used

Note: For all the images shown above (settings for ports) there will be a significant difference between the case "Last configuration" and the actually connected state.

In "Last configuration" mode you just see the last configuration (last files) downloaded from the remote TOPEX system. It is not possible to make offline changes, therefore you won’t see a button named "OK", only “Cancel”.

When the OAM program is really connected to a TOPEX multiAccess system (online) the changes can be performed and "OK" button will be visible (active) in the windows.

Page 111 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual 3.15.4 Configuring the channels of VoIP cards If you selected for VoIP card the option of H323 or SIP protocol, the following window will show up to configure

port settings for a VoIP voice channel. The protocol H323 or SIP which is running on VoIP card is established in "VOIP Configuration" window (icon " ").

Installed - allows activation of that port;

IN - input, port used only for incoming calls;

OUT - output, port used only for outgoing calls;

Monitoring - the system collects additional information for this port in activity (monitoring) files;

Direction - the direction to which the port is belonging. The direction can be selected from the list that contains all the directions specified in "Define directions names". The value "255" indicates an unallocated direction;

Second Category – a maximum 8 digits field, which can be assigned to the specified port.

If you press the button „...” located on the right of the „Second Category” field you will see the „Computing Second Category” field where you can set the „RTP Proxy” option.

The "Saving Options" section of the window is useful when it is necessary to make changes for the entire card (all of the ports of that card).

Those changes are for "Category" and "Direction"- you check the ones you want. Also, to set a certain value for an option for the entire card, the box "Apply settings for all positions on card" must be selected.

Note: On the bottom side of the “VOIP Settings” window, there is an area called "IP Card Settings". Here the values for the fields "RTP start" and "Range" are displayed. These values are shown in gray, because you can’t change (modify) them, they are just displayed for your information.

3.16 Options selected with the right mouse button Once the OAM application is connected to a system, the user can point with the right mouse button over a port

or over a card in the "Port Status" or in "Trunk Status" areas. Depending on the place on the screen, a menu with different options is displayed: - the user can add a card (Adding card) in configuration or delete a card (Removing card) from configuration. If the position of card is empty (an empty rectangle is drawn in the position of card) he can add a card to the remote system. There are the following possibilities of cards to be added to a an empty position: "Subscriber" (FXS),"GSM","JPABX" (FXO) ,"BL", "ISDN-BRI" or "E&M". On an empty E1 trunk we can add an E1R2, E1ISDN or E1SS7 trunk card or a VoIP card. - the user can start the "Debug" feature if he clicks with the right mouse button over a port. For example in the next image can be seen when the user press the right mouse button over an installed card (the port position in this example is 1).

You can point with the right mouse button over a port or over a card in the "Port Status" or in "Trunk Status" areas.

Depending on the location on the screen, a menu with different options will be displayed:

TOPEX S.A. Page 112

TOPEX multiAccess

- You can start the "Debug" feature (see later in the manual) if you click with the right mouse button over a port. For example the image above can be seen when you press the right mouse button over an installed card (the port position in this example is 1);

- If you point the right mouse button over a mobile (CDMA or GSM) interface board you have several new choices in addition to the Debug and Add / Remove options that are common for all types of plug-in cards. For instance, for a GSM port;

- You may start the option "Commands" which allows you to enter the selected port in a monitoring state and therefore to send AT commands directly to the GSM/UMTS/CDMA module;

- You may select the option "Cell Info" which allows you to see the cell in which the SIM from the selected GSM port is registered. There are also shown the GSM level and the GSM channel. For UMTS/CDMA modules only the signal level is available;

- You may select the option "Audio Level" which allows you to view and to modify the GSM / UMTS / CDMA audio level;

- You may select the option "Neighbor Cells" which allows your to view data about the neighbor cells of the mobile network. This option is not available for UMTS or CDMA modules;

- You may select the option "Send SMS" which allows your to send a SMS from the program, using the selected GSM port;

- You may select the option "Test Port" which allows you to test the selected GSM port;

- Or you may select the option "Test Card" which allows you to test the whole GSM interface board (with two mobile modules).

Remember that all mobile related options (such as "Commands", “Cell Info", etc) work directly with the wireless modem module. They require the selected mobile port to be placed in a process of monitoring.

Therefore those commands cannot work at the same time (only one of them can be active at any given moment).

If you installed a CDMA board there are only three options available. The difference from a GSM port is that the direction to which the CDMA port belongs contains DIRMODULECDMA mask in the "Signaling" field. For CDMA you have the following choices with the right mouse button:

- Start the option "Commands" that allows to put the selected port in a monitoring state and therefore to send AT commands to the respective CDMA module;

- Select the option "Received Signal Level" - this allows you to see the level (signal strength) for the respective CDMA module;

- Select the option "Audio Level" which allows you to view and to modify the audio level of the CDMA module;

3.16.1 Debug This option provides you the possibility to analyze the cards status and to make tests for one or several cards.

The "Debug" option can be selected for each port by clicking the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen.

The "Debug" window will display the port for which the debug procedure was started. The "Debug" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on the HDD in order to be preserved for future use.

Examples of using debug features: Let’s take for instance two ports, where the first port is a subscriber port (port number 120) and the second is a GSM port (port number 8). A test call will be made from the subscriber to the mobile network. The call is made using the feature "Alerts - testing calls". Card 15 is a subscriber card and card 1 is a GSM card. The phone number used for testing is "0744972569".The source of the call will be the subscriber port 120.

The debug messages will be shown first from the subscriber port, and then from the mobile port.

For each port several cases are illustrated, depending upon the settings of the Topex gateway and upon the state of the phone network.

Page 113 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual FOR SUBSCRIBER SIDE (CALLING PARTY)

Here is shown what happens at the side of the subscriber, in different conditions.

CASE 1) The subscriber has no rights (is not allowed to make calls) When the user selects the debug button in the subscriber window (for port 120) the "Debug window" will be displayed as shown below.

All the activities from that port will be displayed. Each record begins with the port position number (in this case "00120"). Because of the rights that don't allow making calls, the record with "! RIGHTS Connect BUSY" will show up next. The subscriber will get a BUSY tone. The value following the port number is the gateway timer identifier (with steps of 50 msec)

You may use the Log Section to save the debug data in a file. If you check the box, a "LogFile" can be generated in order to analyze later the debugging data. The log file name is always "debug.txt". The option "Reset" is used to reinitialize (clear) the file used for debug. If you don’t press the button Reset, the new data will be appended to the existing debug file.

Since the subscriber is not allowed to make calls, no further actions will be performed.

CASE 2) You add the "Can make calls" option to the selected subscriber. Then the debug information will look like this:

A record "Connect DIAL" specifies the dial attempts and the record "Digits 0744972569" shows the called number.

From the actual routing table no available route (implicit direction) is resulting, so a messages "Dialdigits INEX" will be displayed to show that the number to be dialed is non-existent. The first six digits of the number can be seen in the record "Route N a74497 ... NT a74497 ... RxT 7fff". The first group of maximum six digits shows the original number and the second one (after "NT" characters) shows the numbering digits that result after applying the Ignore and Insert policies from the incoming direction definition (subscriber direction) and the routing table.

Note: from ISDN or GSM the numbering may come either digit-by-digit or as lumped together as a group of digits. If the digits are not coming all together, then several digits messages will be displayed.

The code "7fff" indicates that no route was found. The first digit from the left indicates which type of destination is found: '8' for PORT, '9' for DIR, 'a' for SERV, 'b' for HUNT, 'c' for DIRIP (VoIP connection) or 'd' for LCR (those are the keywords which are used in the "Action" field in the routing table definitions).

The rightmost digit from this code is returning the record number which is found on the routing table for DIR, SERV, and LCR records. For PORT records the last two digits are indicating the hex value of the destination port.

The call cannot get further because no route exists for it. CASE 3) You add a record with prefix '0' in the routing table, to create the required route. Now the debug messages will look like this:

The record starting with '0' in the prefix field specifies that the calls beginning with '0' will be routed on "OTHERS" direction.

TOPEX S.A. Page 114

TOPEX multiAccess

A record "Connect DIAL" specifies the dial attempt and the record "Digits 0744972569" shows you the called number.

On the selected direction (which results from the routing table) no available mobile modules were found, thus a congestion message has shown up: "Dialdig CONGESTION".

The call cannot get further because no mobile modules are free. CASE 4) with the same setting in the routing table but with available (free) mobile modules

First is shown a situation with when the destination is BUSY. The line "Dialdig M_CALL" and line "Dialdig ACK_CALL ->Dialdest" are indicating that the call was routed through destination port and a confirmation from that port was obtained. The words "Dialdest CONNECT->preanswer" indicates that the reverse tone was sent the calling party. The line with "PreanswerA TimeOut|CANCEL -> BUSY" indicates the "BUSY" situation (after the time period specified by TimeOut the calling attempt has been canceled because the called party was busy).

The next example indicates an answer at destination: "PreanswerA TAX -> ANSWER".

Now the line "AnswerA CANCEL -> IDLE" indicating that the upon termination of the call the connection was broken (closed) from the subscriber side ('A' party).

CASE 5) Suppose you adding a record with prefix '0' in the routing table, which cause the call to be routed to SERV number '4'

This record specifies that the destination is SERV with a value of '4'. The value of '4' is used to get a flashing tone. The flashing tone of a phone exchange may be use to verify its operation.

The last line of the Debug window, "PreanswerA FLASHING => ANSWER" indicates a successful connection to the flashing tone.

Page 115 TOPEX S.A.


2) FOR mobile (CDMA or GSM) PARTY Now you are shown what happens with the call at the side of the mobile module, also in different conditions.

CASE 1) no dial tone for mobile module (congestion in the mobile cell)

The messages sent from the TOPEX gateway to the mobile module are indicated by characters "Tx" and the messages received from the mobile module are indicated by "Rx" characters. The line "Digits 07400000000 Ident 120" indicates the number (to be dialed) and the identity that the mobile module is receiving from the telephony application. The number used for illustrating this situation can be seen in the line "Tx GSM ATD07400000000" after "ATD" characters. Finally, the congestion situation is indicated by the line "Rx GSM NO DIALTONE".

CASE 2) at destination you have a wrong number, the called party does not answer or it is not reachable

The number used in order to illustrate this situation is the same "07400000000". This “no answer” situation is indicated by the line "Rx GSM NO CARRIER"

CASE 3) at destination you have a busy number

The mobile phone number used for illustrating this situation is the same "0744972569". The “destination busy” situation is indicated in the line before the last: "Rx GSM BUSY".

CASE 4) normal answer at destination

Finally, an example of Debug display in case of normal answer on the GSM side of the call.

The mobile number used for illustrating this situation is the same "0744972569". The connection of the ring back tone is indicated by the line "GSMpreanswerB OK -> ANSWER" and the answer situation is indicated by the line "Rx GSM OK".

TOPEX S.A. Page 116

TOPEX multiAccess

3.16.2 Commands This option can be selected for each GSM port by clicking the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The "Commands" feature works only if the selected mobile module is not in a seized or programming phase.

The "Configuration manager" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for future use.

The "Configuration manager" window which shows up is used for entering direct AT commands for the specified CDMA or GSM port. When this window is displayed, the "gwconfig" software will send automatically the command which will place the selected port in the monitoring state ("set moni xxx", where "xxx" is the port position which is displayed on the application panel).

The TOPEX gateway must send back the confirmation message "moni xxx", where 'xxx' is the mobile port position. If the respective mobile port couldn't be placed into the monitoring state the following warning message is received: "res moni" (in the section "Exchange response zone"). This message is received when the CDMA or GSM port is busy or initializations are performed on that module. In such a situation the user must type first "res moni' to reset the port and after that "set moni xxx".

In the “Send commands” field the user can type AT commands which will be send directly to the selected mobile port (further information are presented in menu option "Facilities - Commands").

“Log Section” at the bottom refers to the logging (recording) of everything that appears in the two fields (commands typed and answers from the mobile module). The name of the file with the log of AT commands is “command.txt”. If you want to delete these file, press the button “Reset”.

3.16.3 Cell Info (GSM / UMTS port)

This option is also displayed in the menu option that shows up after a right mouse click over a mobile port. The "Cell Info" feature works only for certain mobile networks and if the selected mobile module is not in a seized state or programming phase. The "Cell Info" option can be selected for a mobile port by clicking the left mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The window that shows up will have in the title bar the port number for which that option is selected. You may resize the "Viewing GSM Info" window or move it across on the screen as you wish. This info (window position and size) will be saved in a file on the HDD in order to be preserved for a future use. First, the mobile module will be placed in a monitoring state. Then the command "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be sent to the main gateway application. The mobile module will be placed in a continuous interrogation state (at 5 seconds intervals). The following values are displayed:

Current cell to which the SIM/RUIM (from the mobile module) is registered; Reception level (expressed in dBm); Channel (frequency) used for communication with the respective mobile cell.

- for an UMTS port is available only the level interrogation. The level value is read only once. "Cell ID" and "Channel" fields are completed with "-------" to indicate the absence of information.

The indication of receiving signal strength is done in a range from 0 to 31 as follows: 0 -> Equal to or less than -113 dBm 1 -> -111 dBm 2...30 -> -109... -53 dBm 31 -> Equal to or higher than -51 dBm 99 -> Unknown or unmeasurable.

Page 117 TOPEX S.A.


3.16.4 Received Signal Level (CDMA port) This option is displayed in the menu option which appears after a right mouse click over a CDMA port. For CDMA only the level is shown, no cell info is available.

Here also the "Received Signal Level" feature works only if the selected CDMA module is not in a seized state or programming phase.

The "Received Signal Level" option can be selected for a CDMA port by clicking the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. In the window title bar will be also displayed the port number for which that option is selected.

The "Received Signal Quality" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for later use.

The CDMA module will be first placed in a monitoring state. For this, you must issue to the main application running on the TOPEX gateway the command "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be.

The CDMA module will be interrogated upon for the following values: SQM - Signal Quality Measure, where 0 - 31 => Signal Quality Measurement and the value “99” means

not known or not selectable; FER - Frame Error Rate:

0 => <0.01%; 1 => from 0.01% to less then 0.1%; 2 => from 0.1% to less then 0.5%; 3 => from 0.5% to less then 1.0%; 4 => from 1.0% to less then 2.0%; 5 => from 2.0% to less then 4.0%; 6 => from 4.0% to less then 8.0%; 7 => ≥ 8.0%; 99 => unknown or not selectable.

3.16.5 Audio Level (GSM port) This option also shows up in the menu option which appears after a right mouse pressing over a mobile (GSM) port. The "Audio Level" feature works only if the selected mobile module is not in a seized or programming phase. "Audio Level" option can be selected for a GSM port by clicking the left mouse button on the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The window title bar will show the port number for which that option is selected. The "Audio Level" window can be resized or moved across on the screen as you wish. This info (window position and size) will be saved in a file on the HDD in order to be preserved for a future use.

To display or change the audio level, the mobile module must be first placed in a monitoring state. Then the command "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be sent to the main gateway application. The mobile module will be placed in a continuous interrogation state (at 5 seconds intervals).

The "Audio Level" window will show the "Level" after the first successful level interrogation.

There are some differences related to the exact type (manufacture) of the mobile module.

For a Siemens mobile module the user can change both input and output levels.

There are 4 possible values for input or output level. By pressing "+" button the input or output level will be increased and by pressing "-" button that level will be decreased.

There are "+" and "-" buttons for each level indicator: input and respectively output.

TOPEX S.A. Page 118

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 119 TOPEX S.A.

For a Voxson mobile module: there are 8 (eight) possible values for the level. By pressing "+" button the level will be increased and by pressing "-" button the level will be decreased.

For an UMTS module: there are 4 possible values for level. By pressing "+" button the level will be increased and by pressing "-" button the level will be decreased.

3.16.6 Audio Level (CDMA port) The “audio level” option is similar for CDMA ports, there are minor differences.

This option is displayed in the menu option which appears Following a right mouse click over a CDMA port. The "Audio Level" feature works only if the selected CDMA module is not in a seized or programming phase. The "Audio Level" option can be selected for a CDMA port by click the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The port number for which that option is selected will be also displayed in the window title bar. The "Audio Level" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for future use.

The CDMA module must first be placed in a state of monitoring. The "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port, 64 in this example) will be sent to the main gateway application.

The "Audio Level" window will display the "Level" after the first successful level interrogation of the CDMA module.

There are only 4 (four) possible values for audio level. By pressing "+" button the audio level will be increased and by pressing "-" button the level will be decreased.

3.16.7 Neighbor Cells (only for a GSM port) This option is displayed in the menu option which appears after a right mouse click over a GSM port. The

"Neighbor Cells" feature is working only if the selected GSM module is not in a seized or programming phase. The "Neighbor Cells" option can be selected for a GSM port by pressing the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The port number for which that option is selected will be also displayed in the window title bar. The "Neighbor Cells" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for future use.

The GSM module will be first place in a monitoring state. The "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be sent to the main gateway application. The GSM module will be continuously interrogated (at periods of 5 seconds). The mobile module will be first placed in a monitoring state. The "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be send to the main gateway application. The mobile module will be placed under a continuous interrogation state (at periods of 5 seconds).


For a Siemens GSM module the following info is shown: "Chann" - ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel

Number) of the BCCH carrier; "rs" - RSSI (Received signal strength) of the BCCH

carrier, decimal value from 0 to 63. The indicated value is composed of the measured value in dBm plus an offset;

"dBm" - receiving level in dBm; „PLMN” – PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) ID

code ; "BCC" - base station color code; "C1" - coefficient for base station selection; "C2" - coefficient for base station reselection.

In case of a mobile module from Voxson the following information is displayed:

"Chann" - channel number;

"dBm" - receiving level in dBm;

"BSIC" - base station identification code;

"LAC" - location area code;

"C1" - coefficient for base station selection;

"C2" - coefficient for base station selection.

Note: This option is not working for an UMTS module!

3.16.8 Send SMS (GSM port)

This option is displayed in the menu option which appears after a right mouse click over a GSM/UMTS port. The "Send SMS" feature is working only if the selected GSM module is not in a seized or programming phase. The "Send SMS" option can be selected for a GSM port by pressing the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The port number for which that option is selected will be also displayed in the window title bar. The "Send SMS" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for future use.

Option "SMS" allows to send SMS message to the mobile number you want. In the dialog box "SMS Editor" a number for SMS destination and the SMS text must be entered to send a SMS. Press the button "OK" and the SMS will be sent. Note: in case that "SMS center" field is not completed - then in sending SMS process it will be used the SIM SMS center. Otherwise - for SMS center is used the value from "SMS center" field.

The "send moni xxx" ("xxx" is the selected port) will be send to the main gateway application. Then the mobile module will be placed under a continuous interrogation state (at time intervals of 5 seconds each).

The option "SMS" allow you to send SMS message to the phone number you wish. The “SMS Editor” window contains the next fields:

TOPEX S.A. Page 120

TOPEX multiAccess "SMS destination phone number" – insert the mobile phone number where you want to send the SMS message; „SMS center” – the number of SMS center of the operator which control the SIM card where from the SMS message is sent;

„SMS content” – the text of the SMS message that will be sent.

Finally press the button "OK" and the Topex gateway will try to send the SMS.

If the SMS message can't be sent the following message is displayed.

If the SMS message is sent successfully the next message will be shown.

3.16.9 Test Port (only GSM port) This option is displayed in the menu option which appears after a right mouse click over a GSM port. The "Test

GSM" option can be selected for a GSM port by pressing the right mouse button over the corresponding rectangle from the screen. The port number for which that option is selected will be also displayed in the window title bar. The "Test GSM" window can be resized or moved on the screen. The window position and size will be saved on a file on HDD for a future using.

This option is used to test the GSM interface. The program uninstalls that interface. After the test is finished the GSM interface will be automatically reinstalled and reprogrammed. When the program uninstalls the GSM module, there is a delay until the application starts the interrogation procedure of the GSM modules. The maximum delay is 30 seconds.

To start a GSM position test you must press the button "Start".

A detailed explanation about the displayed fields can be found later in this chapter:"Test GSM Card"

Note: The options: "Commands", Cell Info", "Audio Level", "Neighbor Cells", "Send SMS" and "Test GSM" require the selected GSM port to be placed under monitoring process. Therefore all these commands cannot work at same the time, you must select only one of them.

Page 121 TOPEX S.A.


3.16.10 Test GSM card (only GSM port) This option is used to test both wireless modules of a mobile (CDMA or GSM) interface board (UABxxx). For details, see chapter “TESTING THE MOBILE MODULES BOARD” in this manual.

If you want to test the whole mobile interface board, you should use command “Test GSM Card”. But if you need to test only one of the mobile modules of the board, use instead the command “Test Port” which is faster, because it checks only the specified port.

The program uninstalls the board automatically, but you can also un-install it manually. This is done by un-marking the option "Installed" from the section "Categories". The un-installing can be done only once, then you may perform the board test as many times as you want on the same board position (the both GSM modules must not be in speaking state).

After the test is finished the two GSM interfaces will be automatically reinstalled and reprogrammed. When the program uninstalls the modules automatically, there is a delay until the application starts the procedure of interrogating the GSM modules. The maximum delay is 30 seconds.

To start a GSM card test you must go to the "Port Status" area and right click the GSM board you want to test. In order to interrogate the GSM interface, select "Test GSM card". The test window "GSM CARD ANALYSIS" will show up, as shown next:

You notice the two sections, "GSM0" and "GSM1", for the two GSM ports of the GSM interface. Each section includes information about the ordinal number of the port (in the above figure, 56 and respectively 57). The other cases will be filled only after launching the "Start" command. The application starts testing the first GSM module of the board, "GSM0".

Note: Since the program performs automated un-installation of modules prior to their testing, there will be a time interval from the moment you press "Start" button until the refreshed information is displayed on screen. This delay is needed by the software application in order to perform interrogation of GSM modules. You'll have to wait at most 30 seconds.

Each GSM module will undergo through these phases:

a) It is monitored. This supervision means that the software application is allowed to communicate directly with the monitored GSM module. This is precisely what pressing "Start" button does - it begins the monitoring for the respective GSM module.

b) The normal monitoring of the module is indicated by the "MONI OK" message shown on white background in the box located to the right of the port position. Another answer may be the word "Timeout" shown on a red background. This indicates that no communication was established between the module and the application during the timeout delay (preset at about 30 seconds). In this case you must click again the "Start" button to launch once more the test. The following information will be interrogated: manufacturer of the GSM module, model (type of device), revision (name, number and date of issue) and IMEI code. See in the next image an example, where Voxson modules are identified.

TOPEX S.A. Page 122

TOPEX multiAccess

c) After the module is set to the supervised state, comes the scanning of the four SIM cards in order to check their status (if it is present or not). For each SIM that is found to be present, interrogation will follow about its state of registration in a mobile network. Other data requested are: IMSI code of the respective SIM and mobile operator where the SIM card was registered. Also in case of SIM registration, reception level ("dBm") and current cell will be displayed.

d) Situations that are identified - successive stages:

d1) Transition from one SIM to another - column "AT-SIM" The program issues an AT-type command that allows going from a SIM position to the next one. In case of confirmed (successful) switching the message "SIM OK" will be shown on a white background; If the timeout period has expired and switching from one SIM position to another is not confirmed, a "Timeout" message will be shown on a red background (the valid response is waited for 30 seconds). This warning means you must start again the test;

d2) Presence indication - column “PRESENCE”

No SIM card on one or several of the positions SIM1, SIM2, SIM3 and SIM4. The absence of SIM card is indicated by the message "ERROR" and by the red color of the background of the case "PRESENCE". In the above example the passage from one position to another was successful, but no SIM cards were found, hence all the "PRESENCE" boxes show the text "Error" on red background. If a SIM has not answered during the preset time interval (this is unlikely, it can seldom happen)(the response is waiting during 20 seconds), the message "Timeout" will be displayed on a red background. When a SIM card is not present or does not answer on time, no further interrogations are performed. This means you will not see the other information, which are the state of registration, the IMSI and the mobile operator;

SIM present - the presence of a SIM card on the respective position is indicated by the message "READY" written on a white background. The interrogation process continues with the interrogation of the registration status of that SIM;

SIM present, but PIN code is requested - the option "Request PIN" has been enabled for that SIM card. The box "PRESENCE" will display the text "SIM PIN" on a white background. The PIN code is supplied automatically by the software application. The PIN code is found in the GSM Settings window for the respective GSM module. The interrogation process continues next with the interrogation of the state of registration of the SIM card;

SIM present, but PUK code is requested. This is indicated by the message "SIM PUK" that is displayed on a red background. The process of interrogating the respective SIM ends here.

d3) Registration indication - column “REGISTRATION STATUS”

"registered" - the SIM card is registered on the network; the text "registered" will show on a white background; "not registered, not trying" - the SIM card is NOT registered and it does not even try to register. This warning is

shown on a red background; "not registered, trying" - the SIM is not actually registered but it is trying. Indicates that the SIM is currently

searching a new operator to register on it. This warning is shown on a red background. It is possible that the field strength (RF signal) is too low or the antenna is not connected properly;

"registration denied" - registration of the SIM is forbidden; This error is shown on a red background; "unknown" - unknown; Also shown on a red background; "registered, roaming"- The SIM card is registered and also has roaming facilities. The text is displayed on a white

background; normally, you should NOT use for your Topex gateway SIM cards with the roaming feature enabled.

d4) IMSI code - column “IMSI”

this is the "International Mobile Station Identity" code that uniquely identifies each SIM card. The IMSI code is 15 digits long and includes information about mobile country code, mobile network code and mobile station (subscriber) identification number. The value of the IMSI code is shown upon a white background. In case of error, when the IMSI code is the same with the IMSI code from another SIM card from the same GSM module, the respective values will indicate warning by means of a red background;

the IMSI code is requested only if a SIM card has been found on the respective position

d5) operator - column “OPERATOR”

identifies the mobile operator (provider). It may be the name of the operator or his network code (in the example above you can see the Romanian operator "CONNEX GSM"). The operator is requested only if the SIM card on the respective position is properly registered on the mobile network.

d6) reception level ("dBm") and current cell

e) When all the tests are ended, the message box "The test is ended" shows up in the center of the screen. This indicates that the tests are finished for the respective GSM board.

Page 123 TOPEX S.A.


3.16.11 Add / Remove cards By pressing the right button of mouse you can add / remove cards. If the position of the selected card is empty (in the respective position an empty rectangle is shown) you can add a card to the remote system. Several types of cards can to be added to a an empty position: "Subscriber", "GSM", "JPABX", "BL", "E&M" or “IP”. On an empty E1 trunk you can add a E1R2, E1ISDN or E1 SS7 trunk card. If a card is present on the respective position, you may remove it from the remote TOPEX multiAccess system.

On an uninstalled card position (an empty rectangle) an option for adding a card will appear. Click on this option to add a new card to the system.

Password protection for adding a card – to add a card to the TOPEX structure you must enter the correct password.

You are asked for confirmation. Click the “OK” button to add the card or the “Cancel” button to renounce to the adding procedure.

On an installed card position, an option for removing the card will show up.

The removing of a card is Password protected. You must enter the correct access password.

You are asked for confirmation. Click OK to remove the card.

For details of operation, see paragraphs about “Add card” respectively “Remove card”.

TOPEX S.A. Page 124

TOPEX multiAccess

3.17 Trunk status The “Trunk Status” area of the window features a graphic representation of the channels of each of the digital cards (E1 trunks or VoIP). In fact, the aspect of the “Trunk Status” area will be different, depending upon the number of E1 trunks installed in the gateway and on the signaling used (ISDN, SS7, R2 etc).

3.17.1 Trunk status of E1 card The maximum number of E1 trunks that can be installed in a standard TOPEX multiAccess system is four (there is also a version of the Topex equipment with up to eleven trunks!). This is the reason why in "Trunk Status" zone the representation features four E1 trunks. Depending on the number of E1interfaces installed and declared in the system, you may have formed a single one up to all four E1 trunks filled with ports. These four trunks that can be placed on boards 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and respectively 33 (trunk 7).

Notes:

- By default, only one digital card (2E1 or VOIP) can be used in TOPEX gateway. It must be inserted on position to the right of the PG (Processor Card); According, in the "Trunk Status" window only two Trunk rectangles can be filled with channels (if they were declared), the other two will be empty (like in the next image);

- Upon customer's request, the backplane of the TOPEX gateway can be modified to accommodate two digital cards (2E1 or VOIP); for example you can have two 2E1 cards ore one 2E1 card and one VOIP card. They will be inserted on positions to the left and to the right of PG. In this case, on the screen in the "Trunk Status" area all four rectangles can be filled with channels;

- Older versions of the gateway used 1E1 cards, which had a single E1 interface. Consequently, on older TOPEX gateways you may use by default only one E1 trunk - placed on position to the right of PG. If you replace the old 1E1 card with a 2E1 card, you may have two E1 interfaces.

Each E1 trunk is represented with the channels on the fist two rows. To the right side of every trunk representation you can see the number of the respective board (16, 17, 32 and 33). For each E1 trunk, the first two rows show the ports as a rectangle with a letter followed by a two-digit number. The letter indicates the type (signaling) of the E1 trunk: D – E1R2, I – E1ISDN, T – E1S7, and R –E1R1. The third row includes representations of the alarms for the respective E1 trunk. The rectangles for alarms show a three-letters abbreviation for the alarm.

In the following example an E1 - SS7 interface (letter T) can be seen on position 32 and an E1 - ISDN (letter I) can be seen on position 33.

If the E1 boards are older version 1E1 that features only one E1 interface, the interpretation is as follows: - card 32 is located to the right side of the processor card, PG, (as seen from the front panel); - card 33 is located to the left side of the processor card.

If 2E1 boards are used instead (with two interfaces per card) this means:

- the position to the right side of the PG card is 32 (that mean that the first E1 interface is located on position 32 and the next interface is located on position 33);

- the position to the left side of the processor card is 16 (that mean that the first E1 interface is located on position 16 and the next interface is located on position 17).

The indication "SC" (as in T16-SC) is used to highlight the signaling channel of the respective E1 trunk.

See table below for codes (letters) used for representation of the E1 channels on the several kinds of E1 trunks: Letter Type of signaling

D E1R2 trunk (32 channels on a E1 trunk) I E1ISDN trunk ISDN (32 channels) T E1SS7 (32 channels) R E1R1 (32 channels)

Page 125 TOPEX S.A.


The third row of “Trunk Status” area includes representation of the alarm buttons. Each alarm button is marked with an abbreviation for the type of alarm it represents, as described in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal AIS Alarm of Indication Signal LFA Loss of Frame Alignment RJA Remote of Junction Alarm LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm BER Bit Error Rate

Different kinds of E1 trunks will show different types of alarms:

For an ISDN trunk each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with the letter "I" instead of “D” followed by a two-figure channel number and the alarms RSA and LMA are not represented.

For a trunk type R1, each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with the letter "R" followed by a two-figure channel number. On this trunk the "MIC Colisee Impulsion" signaling will be used. "MIC Colisee Impulsions" is a CAS signaling used with the Alcatel 4300 exchange. It sends out the digits of the numbers using DTMF.

For a SS7 trunk, each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with the letter "T" followed by a two-figure channel number.

Note: The new hardware version of the multiAccess gateway uses a 2E1 card featuring two E1 interfaces per board.

3.17.2 Trunk status of VoIP card The representation of the VoIP card features four rows, each with 16 channels. The total number of channels is 64 (compressed voice channels). For each channel, the type of the VOIP card is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter, followed by a two-figure number - the number of the channel.

The VoIP card from TOPEX supports protocols H323 and respective SIP. The codecs used are: G711, G729, and G723a. The code representation used on drawing the VOIP channels shows the supported protocol:

H H323 - VOIP card (64 positions) V SIP - VOIP card (64 positions)

See below “Trunk Status” zone when a VoIP card is inserted in the TOPEX gateway.

A VOIP card is used instead of a 2E1 board. This means it ca be inserted in the rack of the gateway on card 32 (to the right of the processor card) by default. If the TOPEX equipment has a modified backplane, you may place another VoIP or 2E1 card also on position 16 (to the left of the PG).

Please note that the first two channels on the VoIP card ("V00" and "V01") can't be used as valid voice channels.

TOPEX S.A. Page 126

TOPEX multiAccess

3.17.3 Trunk status of E1 ISDN card For E1ISDN trunks two additional values can be set, these are

"Signaling Terminal" - this is the signaling terminal to be allocated for this trunk. You select the terminal number from the drop list (values from 0 to 3). If an E1-ISND trunk is already installed in the system, when you select “Signaling Terminal” for the second, only the available signaling terminals will be displayed in the list (which are NOT used by the first ISDN trunk)

"Signaling Channel" - this is the signaling channel to be used for the trunk (valid values area from 1 to 31). If you use “MIC Colisee Impulsions” signaling and have selected R1, the aspect of the Trunk Status area will be different, as shown below.

Please note that in case of MIC signaling the ports of the E1 trunk card are marked with the letter “R” for R1 signaling. After selecting the R1 option, when you right click one port the next window (called now R1 Settings) will be displayed: Installed – allows activation of the port; if this option is not selected then the port cannot make or receive calls; IN – port used only for calls coming in;

OUT – port used only for calls going out; Monitoring – the system sends to the OAM program more detailed monitoring information for that port Direction – the name of direction to which this port was assigned. Besides the usual buttons to the right, “Save”, “Cancel” and “Help”, you have two new options, MSKB1 and MSKB2. These are two bits used for further expansion, allowing additional selections. For the time being, these two bits are not used – for MIC signaling they are both zero. So you must leave those two boxes unchecked.

3.17.4 Trunk status of E1 card with SS7 settings If you use a SS7 trunk, select the “SS7” box in the window “E1 Card configuration” so you may configure the E1 trunk for System 7 signaling. Note: That SS7 features several additional parameters, you must perform adequate configuration of parameters for SS7 as indicated in the following paragraphs.

Define the "SS7 Parameters" using the bottom of the settings window an additional zone, which is called "SS7 Parameters".

The values that you can set here are "SLC" and "LinkSet".

SLC (Signaling Link Code) – you must have the same code in both ends of the signaling link.

Linkset - this code is an internal codification to associate an adjacent signaling point. See also definition of zone "Adjacent SP (LinkSet)" in the "MTP Configuration" window (icon " ").

After you finished adding the E1-SS7 board to the TOPEX System, the screen will show it like this:

Now you must configure the SS7 board. There are used two configuration window specific for SS7, first "ISUP Configuration" and then “MTP Configuration”. See the corresponding paragraphs in this OAM manual.

This bottom bar of the window is displayed only if a SS7 board is present in the gateway configuration. It is a representation of the accessibility of the remote (adjacent or non-adjacent) signaling points..

The TOPEX gateway can handle connections to maximum 32 signaling points (SP) which are represented by the above boxes with values from 00 to 31.

Page 127 TOPEX S.A.


Values from 0 to 3 are used for adjacent signaling points and values from 4 to 31 for non-adjacent signaling points.

The colors used in displaying the "Remote SP accessibility" bar are: - connection to a SP not installed - light blue; - connection to a SP installed - dark blue.

The information regarding the installed SP connections is read from the "MTP Configuration" file (" ") - the enabled routes (option "Route x", where x is from 0 to 31).

3.18 Card status

In the area "Card status" of the window, the first row is a representation of the status of the boards installed in the cabinet of the equipment. Each board is shown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the 19" rack of the TOPEX equipment, from right to the left. The current status of the board is shown by its color. Color significance:

Dark blue Board installed or that position is available (free); Board not installed (the box "Installed" from the window for configuring the settings of the port has not been checked); Light blue

White That position is already used (the port is engaged);

Red Alarm for that board or port (if the monitoring is started!). The second row shows the status of the E1 trunk boards.

The four digital E1 trunks may be installed on boards 16, 17, 32 or 33. In the example below two E1 trunks are on positions 32 and 33:

TOPEX S.A. Page 128

TOPEX multiAccess

3.19 Monitoring the gateway operation There are a few options (commands) you can select to monitor the correct operation (functioning) of the TOPEX multiAccess gateway:

3.19.1 Status monitoring For viewing online the state of the TOPEX multiAccess (while in the connected state): you can select the corresponding icon (" ") to start monitoring the system. If the monitoring process is started then the icon will be

displayed inside a gray rectangle " ". A command to view the state will be sent to the TOPEX system at regular intervals (5 seconds). The monitoring process may be stopped by pressing once again the icon. You can follow up: For ports (port status):

- white color - which port is opened (used); - red color - which port is in alarm - for a GSM port this means no SIM is active and for subscriber ports, that a

line in fault condition. There are several possible error situations for CDMA or GSM positions. See for example a mobile module in error (displayed in red color-therefore no SIM registered). Following the port position and a line character it is also shown a value from 0 to 5 which describes the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position;

In this example the cause of error is "2" – meaning "no physical SIM". - light blue color - invalid position - the "Installed" field is not set or there is a board error. An error in one of

the plug-in board errors will show up in red in the card status area. Card error will show in the following instances: absence of an installed card (which is present in the configuration) or damaged board and therefore it cannot be interrogated by the processor board;

- dark blue color - available port (card installed and operating properly). For E1 trunk you may see the alarmed channels and the situations of possible alarms on the trunk: LIS, LFA,

LMA, AIS, SLIP, RSA, RJA, CCS and BER; For “card status” the colors are: dark blue for installed board, light blue for board not installed and red for alarm on

that card; For the E1-ISDN trunk, the indication “SC” is used to display the state of the signaling channel: color dark blue

indicates that the link is up, color red shows that the link is down (LAYER2 alarm), and color white indicates that the board is currently trying to restore the link. See example below:

If you want to get out of the state of monitoring the TOPEX equipment, you stop the interrogation by clicking the appropriate icon from the toolbar.

3.19.2 Cell, Level and Channel info When the program is in connected state with a TOPEX E1 Mobile gateway you may select this option from the toolbar by clicking the icon "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info". If you want to viewing cell, level and channel info choose the icon (" "). This will display info about the mobile interface: Cell ID, signal level and GSM channel (frequency).

This option is selected in connected state with a gateway from the toolbar by pressing the icon "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info". For viewing cell, level and channel info choose the icon (" ").

Page 129 TOPEX S.A.


The window "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info" will present for a list of GSM modules (modules that contain the "Installed" option in the "Category" field and for which there is no alarm indication) the "Cell", "Level" and "Channel" information. In the right side of the window is displayed a statistic for each cell to which GSM modules are registered. For each cell the number of modules connected "Count" and the average "Level" is presented. The window position and size will be kept on a file on HDD for a future using.

3.19.3 Calls monitoring For viewing online calls on the gateway equipment - you can choose icon to start call monitoring (" "). If the

call monitoring process is started then the icon will be displayed in a gray rectangle. The call monitoring can be stopped at any time by pressing one more time the same icon or the window closing box. Following the validation of the icon, several types of monitoring windows can be displayed:

a) LIVE Monitoring (n), where n may be from 1 to 4 b) LIVE Monitoring – Report on DIRECTIONS c) LIVE Monitoring – IP signaling a) The first type of window, “LIVE Monitoring (n)”, is used to see on line the calls passing all the range of

ports of the EONES gateway. The range is defined from 0 to 1471, for all directions on incoming and outgoing sides. The user has the possibility to open up to 4 (four) windows of that type. The tooltip displayed for the live monitoring icon is “Calls monitoring – new window”. When all the four windows are opened the icon tooltip will show “Calls monitoring – no window available”. Through those four windows you have the possibility to filter calls from different directions on both incoming or outgoing ways.

The digit “n” shown between the round brackets (and ) represents the index of the window - it can be a value from one to four. In this example you see the window (1):

TOPEX S.A. Page 130

TOPEX multiAccess

Each call in progress is displayed with following parameters: - type (IN / OUT), - the port source ("PortS"), - number made ("Number"), - identity of the call ("Identity"), - day and time, - the field "Duration1" is filled with the time of selection. - the field "Duration2" is filled with the conversation time. - the status of a call can take the following values:"SETUP", "PROCEED","ALERTING","CONNECTED" and "RELEASED" (the background color is different for each type of status). - the destination port ("PortD") - can take a value of "65535" until the incoming call is routed through an destination port. - "End" - finalization call mode - possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT. It indicates the mode of ending the call:

- first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party or B=called party - next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK - ANSWER (response in the

destination part), RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy), INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route), CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no available resources), SERR - SERR (Signaling error), NERR - NERR (Network error), NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone), BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation) and TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)

- "End2" - finalization call mode on ISDN calls - possible values are ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard for release code - “IP:Port (sign)” – the IP signaling port – filled in case of incoming voip calls and viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records (IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option). - “IP:Port (RTP)” – the IP signaling RTP– filled in case of incoming voip calls and viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records (IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option).

Note1: The fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the status field takes the value "RELEASED". Note2: Initially the LIVE MONITORING window displays the IN records (the incoming side of each call; not the output side of the call. This is performed in order not to have the same call into two records. Because for an incoming call will have in case of routing succes another correspondent line in which the source port is the destination port from the other record.)

The Filter option displays a window “Live Monitoring Filter” in which you can select as you wish the range of ports to be monitorized through the live monitoring process.

You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVE Monitoring". The format to be used is "xx-yy" for a range of port or simple ‘x’ for just a port. The separation character is a comma “,”. The monitoring will be displayed for the selected ports (the cumulation for the range of ports and ports). The default range which is used is from 0 to 1471. Also you can select a direction for viewing incoming or outgoing calls (Direction – port source or port destination).

The name of log file is always "livex.txt" (where ‘x’ is 1,2,3 or 4 depending of the “LIVE Monitoring” window rank). The content of the file can be reset with the option "Reset".

Page 131 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual On the bottom of “LIVE Monitoring” window there is a statistic (which can be restarted through the ”Clear”

button), which contains the live number of total calls and connected calls, the ASR and ACD values and the time since the supervision was started.

The “Graph” button is used to display a statistic on the last 60 minutes upon the values of ASR and ACD.

In the upper part of the previous picture you can see a statistic on the ACD (Average call duration). The color which is used for ACD is blue, and for the average ACD is yellow.

On the bottom half of the last picture there is a statistic on the ASR. The color which is used for ASR is green, and for the average ACD is yellow.

The calculated values for both ASR and ACD are highlighted in blue color. Tooltips with the calculated values are displayed if the user put the mouse over those points.

b) LIVE Monitoring – Report on Directions This live monitoring window show an online statistic on each direction (input and output) and a total. Only the

directions for which at least a port is installed on the gateway will be displayed. There is an indication on each direction about the number of connected calls (displayed with blue color), number of attempted calls (displayed with red color) and online ASR. By pressing on a column (IN or OUT) for a direction a new window will be displayed ("Type of call end" window).

Here you can obtain detailed information regarding the end of a call attempt. The information is structured in three columns:

- first column "Side A" contains all calls released from caller party. - second column "Side B" contains all calls released from called party. - third column "Total" contains all calls.

TOPEX S.A. Page 132

TOPEX multiAccess

For each zone, when you clikc over a column, the causes for calls releasing are detailed as shown:

c) LIVE Monitoring – IP Signaling A single window which provides access to the calls which are passing through our EONES equipment. This

happens when the EONES gateway is performing just the VoIP signaling and when the RTP is made without using the resources of EONES VoIP channels, or in case of incoming VoIP calls. The first type of calls are not using the VoIP ports of EONES and therefore cannot be displayed in one normal windows of the LIVE MONITORING feature. Thus you need the “IP signaling” window to be able to monitor the calls that are bypassing the EONES equipment:

Those are temporary records. For the first type of windows – the records are preserved after disconnection until a new records is coming on the same input or output port. In this second case the records are deleted after 20 seconds.

To close live monitoring windows – you should close down all windows of the first type.Then Live monitoring windows for directions and IP signaling will be also closed, automatically.

Note1: the fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the status field is takes the value "RELEASED".

Note2: You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVE Monitoring". The format to be used is "xx-yy". The calls monitoring will be displayed for the ports in range from "xx" to "yy". Those two values must be separated by the minus character "-". The option "Set" must be used to validate the new port range. The default range which is used is ports from 0 to 319.

Note3: You can select the option "IN" or "OUT". Those two options are about the type of the call (from the point of view of the TOPEX EONES): incoming or outgoing calls. The default option is “IN”, it is automatically selected at startup of live monitoring.

Note4: You may also save all online messages regarding the progress of the calls into a log file The name of this log file is always "live.txt". The content of the file can be reset with the option "Reset".

Page 133 TOPEX S.A.

Software version 5.1.17 OAM Manual 4 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION BY IP The TOPEX multiAccess equipment can be configured (programmed) both from the Internet browser and from the “gwconfig.exe” application (as described earlier in the operating manual). The programming through the client browser is performed by means of text files, while with the gwconfig.exe application the programming is done using binary files.

By means of the “gwconfig.exe” application, the main application running on the TOPEX multiAccess equipment saves the changes operated upon binary files into text files and vice-versa (meaning that the changes operated via Web browser to the text files are also saved into the binary configuration files). The features described in this chapter allows the remote “programming” (i.e. configuration and administration) of the TOPEX multiAccess equipment by means of the web based interface.

This web page is accessed through an Internet browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows. Type in the web browser the IP address of the TOPEX multiAccess equipment and the login image will appear.

4.1 Access to the system (logging in)

Enter the value “tpxadm” in the “Username” field and the “u53rp455” as “Password” and then press the “Login” button. The server checks if the name and password correspond to the ones required for the system (if there is an installed account with that name and if the password is valid).

Access to the TOPEX system: Enter username and password. After choosing the “Login” options the following error cases may arise: - If the NAME (“Username”) has not been

entered the answer will be: “Invalid username or password. Try it again. Error1”

- If the PASSWORD has not been entered the answer will be: “Invalid username or password. Try it again. Error3”

- If the name and password do not agree with an user account defined on the TOPEX equipment the answer will be: “Invalid username or password. Try it again. Error (password don’t match)”

- If there is another client that operates (has logged in) in the system with the same the answer will be: “Invalid username or password. Try it again. Error (logged)”

- If everything is OK, the access to the system is confirmed.

The server automatically generates a key associated to the client that has accessed the system. This key is uniquely associated to the client who has logged into the system. Any operation requested by the flash program will be performed by the server only if the transmitted key is correct. The key will be automatically deleted through the procedure of leaving the system (Logout). Also, the system deletes automatically the key when it senses a lack of activity in the browser for a time interval longer than 10 minutes (the timeout value can be configured by the user). If the authentication was successful the program will go to the next step, the procedure of downloading from the system the configuration files.

There are several configuration files that must be transferred: · File with information about the installed cards ("card.cfg"); · File with information about the port settings ("port.cfg"); . File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.cfg"); · File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg"); · File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin"); · File with information about pin codes on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("pin.cfg"); · File with information about loading on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("loadsim.bin"); · File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces ("tmaxsim.bin"); · File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation to Least Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg"); · Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting and programming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg"); · File with information concerning the parameters used for communication between a Topex gateway and the

"gwconfig" application, and the parameters used for debug purposes ("exec.cfg"); · File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg"); · Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC (circuit identification codes)

allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files used in case of SS7 card presence; Files used for VOIP-H323/SIP configuration: "voip.cfg" and "group.cfg".

TOPEX S.A. Page 134

TOPEX multiAccess

Downloading configuration files

There are progress indicators for all of these files. All these files create a gateway configuration. The "gwconfig" application allows the user to save a gateway configuration into a separate location (directory). Then you can edit (modify) this configuration and later upload it to one or more TOPEX gateways.

There are a few situations that can occur while attempting to connect:

1.The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to a system. If it can't connect at the fourth retry it displays the following error message: "Passing Connection Retry Error".

2. In the case of passing fourth attempts for login the following error message will appear: "Passing Authentication Retry Error". User will not be able to view or modify system configuration.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of the configuration files, it displays the following error message: "Downloading Configuration Failed". User will not be able to view or modify system configuration.

4. If the dialog process between system and OAM computer falls (up to a number of consecutive errors) a "Passing LAPD Retry Error" message occurs.

5. If connection breaks down (because of IP) during the configuration downloading process or during the connected state, a "Connection Lost" message appears.

You can only connect to one TOPEX system at a time. So if you want to connect to another system, you must first disconnect from the previous one.

Please note that there are two types of windows used by the program. There is one window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewing and changing the configuration (settings) of the Topex systems. When you work with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands from the tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mouse button you will be able to hide the window. If you work (change or view) with a certain configuration, this can be hidden using the right mouse button. If the OAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clicking with the right mouse button over the status bar, you will make pop up a window with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

Page 135 TOPEX S.A.


Note: In order to allow additional facilities, the application may also be launched together with the following parameters: 1) The OAM software includes a protection against starting more then one instance. If it is necessary to start the software more then one time, you should use the following command to start the software: "gwconfig.exe -d" or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several Topex gateways. 2) Parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administration program to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a space delimiter and the three following fields: identification name for the remote system, user name and password (to allow automated log-in). For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>". In case of redundancy when the password is not explicity requested - this parameter ("-c") must be used to provide the username/password to connect to each processor card. 3) Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of date. The information saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, live monitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S" 4) There are situations in which the configuration contains files with large dimensions and the process of downloading is taking too much time. In such a situation the "z" parameter must be used in order to compress and transfer from and to proccesor card the compressed files. All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

Note: if another user is connected at the same time with the "gwconfig" software from another PC, when you try to access the Topex gateway you get the following error message:

This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to that gateway has already been accepted. 5) in case of TOPEX equipment with redundancy (multiswitch or EONES) - the application is connecting to each processor card but the configuration is not automatically downloaded like in a normal case. During the system setup -

the user connects to each processor card and downloads the current system configuration - - Downloading Configuration. Every change made from OAM will be done on both processors in the same time. If one processor card

is changed - then the current configuration can be send through the upload icon: - Upload Configuration

TOPEX S.A. Page 136

TOPEX multiAccess

4.2 „Status” option Allows interrogation of the state of the equipment at even intervals of 5 seconds. The window “Status information” will show up if you press the button “Status”:

The window shown above includes three areas: “Port Status”, “Trunk Status” and “Card Status”.

4.2.1 “Port status” Describes the structure of the TOPEX equipment: boards and ports. The structure of plug-in board is suggested from right to left for boards form number 0 up to number 15. The ports on these boards (maximum eight) are displayed from top downwards. Each port is figured as a square marked with a letter together with the physical position in the system (“physical position” means the index number in the equipment, starting from 000 on the first board – board zero – up to 120 on the board no. 14). The letter in the square shows the type of the plug-in board, as follows: ‘S’ – board with subscriber junctions; ‘G’ – board with GSM interfaces (two interfaces per board); ‘P’ – board with PABX junctions; ‘E’ – board with E&M junctions (4 interfaces per board); ‘B’ – board with BL (local battery) junctions; ‘RG’ – board with 4 radio junctions; ‘NT/TE’ – board with 4 ISDN BRI ports; ‘D’ – E1/R2 board with 32 channels; ‘I’ – E1 ISDN PRI board with 32 channels; ‘T’ – E1 SS7 board; ‘R’ – E1R1 board with 32 channels; ‘V’ – VoIP card with H.323 or SIP protocol (8, 16, 32 or 64 channels).

For a position with board not installed, the corresponding column will show nothing.

4.2.2 “Trunk status” It refers to the E1 trunk boards. In the area “Trunk Status” the first two rows show the 32 channels of the E1

trunk. Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter followed by a two-figure number. This number is

the number of the port, while the letter indicates the type of signaling used on the board of the E1 trunk. Thus, D is for R2 signaling, I is ISDN signaling, S is for SS7 signaling and R is for R1 signaling

Out of the 32 channels of the E1 trunk, 30 are voice channels while 00 and 16 are dedicated channels reserved for signaling and synchronization.

On the third row there are represented the alarms buttons. Each button has marked the abbreviation for the type of alarm. The abbreviations of the alarms are listed in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal AIS Alarm of Indication Signal LFA Loss of Frame Alignment RJA Remote of Junction Alarm LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm BER Bit Error Rate

Page 137 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 138

4.2.3 “Card status”

In the card status zone on the first row you can see the state of all the boards plugged into the equipment rack. Each board is shown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the rack (the numbering of the boards is from right to left). On the second row you may see the state of the E1 trunk card. This board is marked as number 32. The surveillance (monitoring) of the state of the equipment is initiated by pressing the button “Start”. At regular intervals of five seconds each the state of the TOPEX equipment will be read.

The positions of the ports are also color-coded. The significance of the colors for the “Port Status” zone is shown below:

Dark blue Position (slot) with board

Light blue Position with board not installed or lack ofcommunication with the board (in this case the cardwill be marked with red in the zone “Card status”)

White Open line

Red Position in alarm or missing SIM on the GSMinterface

The significance of the colors for the “Trunk Status” area of the window is shown in the table below:

Dark blue E1 channel installed Light blue E1 channel not installed

Red E1 channel in alarm

The boxes “LIS”,”LFA”,”LMA”,”AIS”,”RSA”,”RJA” and “BER” are colored in dark blue when there is no error and become colored in red when there is an error.

The significance of the colors for the “Card Status” zone is:

Dark blue Board installed

Light blue Board not installed

Red Alarm on the card

To stop monitoring the TOPEX equipment you must press the “Stop” option button. Pressing the “?” button allows the display of a help (information) window; while the button marked “x” is for closing down the status window. Please note that the help file is searchable, you may look for a word or expression in the overall help and also search for it inside each help page.

TOPEX multiAccess

4.3 Configuration This option allows the configuring of the TOPEX multiAccess equipment. In the configuration window there are

means for navigating through the sub-windows (pages) associated with each of the configuration files used by the program.

The navigation is performed by means of the navigation keys, the buttons “ ” and respectively “ ”. Pressing the button “?” displays a help (assistance) window while the “x” button allows closing down of the window.

4.3.1 Card configuration The first configuration window of the program refers to the plug-in boards (cards): “Card Configuration”. In this window you will see the same information as for the option “Status information” minus the zone “Card status”.

4.3.1.1 Adding a card Adding of a board is performed by left clicking with

the mouse on a position with no board installed. On the screen will appear the „Add Card x” window where you can select the card which will be added to the TOPEX structure.

The abbreviations for the boards are: - “GSM” - mobile modules interface;

- “SUB” - subscriber junctions; - “JPABX” - PABX junctions; - “BL” - local battery interface; - “EM” - E&M junctions.

Select the card and press the „OK” button. If you don’t want to add any card press the „Cancel” button.

For the position of missing E1 trunk you may choose the E1 board from the list included in the “Add E1 card” window. The available options are E1ISDN, E1SS7, E1R1 or E1R2. If you confirm the changes with “OK” the new board will also appear in the “Card Configuration” window.

4.3.1.2 Removing a card To eliminate (delete) a board from the system you must left click with the mouse on a position with installed board and then confirm the action of eliminating that board from the system.

Note: In order to maintain coherency a change in the configuration of the boards must be accompanied by the updating of the configuration of the ports. This is achieved by pressing the button “Apply” from the window with the changes for the ports (the records for ports – from the ports file - for that board will be deleted).

4.3.2 Port configuration The second configuration window refers to the configuration of the ports: “Port Configuration”. In this window will be displayed the same information as for the option “Status information” minus the zone “Card status”. To change categories and fields you left click with the mouse button on a position then operate in the setting window that shows up.

For instance, in the subscriber port case, on the screen will appear the „Changing Setting” window which contains the parameters:

Installed – the respective port is installed; DTMF – the DTMF feature is used; Can make calls – calls can be made from the respective port; Monitoring – the port is monitor; Direction – select the direction name which corresponds to the port; Number – the phone number of the local subscriber; Restr – the restriction class applied for the port; Target – the target field for the calls made from the respective port.

Page 139 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 140

Changing the port data Depending upon the type of the board (or the line) the following changes are allowed:

Type of board/ Field

Subscriber (SUB) GSM JPABX E&M BL E1-R2

Category YES YES YES YES YES YES Direction YES YES YES YES YES YES Target YES YES YES YES YES NO Number YES NO NO NO YES NO Restriction YES NO NO NO YES NO SIM index NO YES NO NO NO NO

Also, depending upon the type of the board the following categories are allowed:

Subscriber (SUB)

Installed, DTMF, Can make calls Monitoring

GSM Installed, IN, OUT, DISA Monitoring

JPABX Installed, IN, OUT, DISA, DTMF Monitoring

EM Installed, IN, OUT, TAX_IN, TAX_OUT Monitoring

BL Installed, Monitoring

E1R2 Installed, IN, OUT, TAX_IN, TAX_OUT Monitoring and type (E1R2, ISDN, SS7, etc.)

The direction field may take the value 255 (meaning it does not belong to any direction) or the name of a direction existing in the list with the names of the directions. This list was defined in page 3 from the configuration window. When you choose “OK” from the changes (modifications) window the name of the direction will be verified. If the direction entered is not 255 or the name of a direction the field will be colored in red. If you bring the mouse cursor over the direction field, the color will get back to white.

The target field must be a value less than 128. When you select the OK option from the window of changes the value of the target field will be checked to be below 128. To verify if the target is not already allocated you enter the number of the port for which you operate changes. If it is not available (free), it will be colored in red. When you bring the mouse cursor over the target field, the color will get back to white.

The SIM index field (for the GSM interfaces - UABGSM boards) may tale values from 0 up to 7. When you select the OK option from the window of modifications the value of the SIM index field will be verified. If it is outside the allowed range (from 0 to 7) the field will be colored in red to signify an error. When you bring the mouse cursor over the SIM index field, the color will get back to white.

The restriction field can take values from 0 up to 19. When you select the option OK from the window of modifications the value of the restriction field will be validated. If it is outside the allowed interval (from 0 to 19) the restriction field will be colored in red to signify an error. When you bring the mouse cursor over the restriction field, the color will get back to white.

The number field can take the value “---“ (meaning not allocated phone number) or a number maximum 8 digits long. When you select the option OK from the window of modifications the string you entered will be checked to verify if it contains only numbers. If it has an error the number field will be colored in red. When you bring the mouse cursor over the restriction field, the color will get back to white.

Please note that the changes will be sent to the Topex system only after you press the button “Apply”. On the title bar will be displayed the text “Port Configuration – Sending data“ and as the remote equipment confirms receiving of the data packages an indicator will display the number of packages transmitted out of the total number of packages. The confirmation of the final reception of the configuration file will be signaled by the message “File sent ok!”.

If you operate configuration changes but you want to go back to the initial state you must press the button “Restore”. If you perform modifications and you go to another page of configuration these changes will be lost.

TOPEX multiAccess

4.4 “Dirname” option The third configuration window is dedicated for modifying the names of the directions: “Edit directions names”. The window shows the list of the directions (up to 20). The Directions are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have common routing characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you assign one or more trunks to each direction.

The “Directions name” window contains two columns labeled “Number” and “Name”. The first column includes the number of direction starting with 00 and the second column contains the direction name.

To edit or change the name of a direction just click on the name of the respective direction and insert the new name of the respective direction.

If during these verifications an error is detected the whole editing window will be colored in red in the lower part of the window a text will be displayed (also written in red) describing the error and the line on which the error has appeared.

The changes will be transmitted to the system only after you press the “Apply Changes” button. On the title bar will be displayed the text “Port Configuration – Sending data “ and as the remote equipment confirms receiving of the data packages an indicator will display the number of packages transmitted out of the total number of packages.

The confirmation of the final reception of the configuration file will be signaled by the message “File sent ok!”. If you operate configuration changes but you want to go back to the initial state then you must press the button “Restore Defaults”. If you perform modifications and you go to another page of configuration without pressing on the “Apply Changes” button these changes will be lost.

4.5 “Directions” option Press the „Directions” button and on the screen you will see the „Directions table” window which contains the definition parameters of each direction for the TOPEX multiAccess gateway.

Page 141 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 142

In order to configure the directions parameters just press with mouse on the respective field. The fields are detailed in the next table:

Name - name of the direction (maximum 9 alphanumeric characters long; the first character of the name must NOT be a letter);

Type - PORT or DIR;

Over - the name of outflow direction in case of call congestion or of the service output on the current direction. The calls will be re-routed through this overflow direction that you specify in here;

Over2 - the name of outflow direction in case of call congestion or of the service output on the current direction. The calls will be re-routed through this overflow direction that you specify in here;

Restr - number of the class of restrictions that will be applied for all of the calls for the respective direction;

Ign – specifies the number of digits that will be ignored out of the number dialed in this direction;

Ins - specifies the digits that will be inserted after the numbering dialed in this direction;

Max d - specifies the maximum number of digits that can be dialed on this direction. When this value is reached the system will send out the call through the direction without waiting to see if the subscriber is still dialing numbers. This feature is useful for the directions for which the number of digits in a phone number is already known.;

Ign id - out of the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number of digits you specify here will be ignored;

Ins id - adds (inserts) to the Caller ID the digits you specify. A maximum number of 8 digits is allowed;

Maxid - the maximum number of digits from the Caller ID that will be sent through this direction;

Sign - specifies the type of signaling to be used on this direction.

After you have made the changes you want press the „Apply Changes” button in order to save the new settings.

Notes: The name of the direction (the field “Name”). This name should be seen again as the name of a direction defined in

the page 3 of the configuration application – “Edit directions name”. If this is not so it will be signaled as an error by the warning message: “D: Wrong field 'name'. The specified name must be defined in directions name”;

The type of port (the field “Type”). This field may have only two values, “PORT” or ”DIR”, respectively the values of 0 (for port) or 1 (for a direction). If this is not true it will be signaled as an error: "D: Wrong field 'type'. Must be PORT or DIR or 0 or 1”;

The name of the overflow direction (field Rename”). This name must be also found as a name of direction defined in the page 3 of the configuration application – “Edit directions name”. If this is not so it will be signaled as an error by the following message: “D: Wrong field 'nname'. The specified name must be defined in directions name.";

The value of the restriction field (“Restr”). As mentioned earlier, this field must have values between 0 and 19. If this is not so it will be signaled as the following error: "D: 'Restr' number error. Must be between 0 and 19";

The value of the ignoring field (“Ign”). It specifies the number of digits to be ignored out of the number dialed on that direction. The values allowed for this field are between 0 and 19.If this is not true it will be signaled as the following error: “D: 'Ign' number error. Must be between 0 and 19”;

The number of digits that may be inserted is of maximum 8. If the value is over this it will be signaled as the following error: "D: 'Ins' field too big. Max. number of digits is 8";

The maximum number of digits for the direction (field “Maxd”). The value should be a number from 0 to 20, otherwise: ”D: 'Maxd' number error. Must be between 0 and 20.”;

The value of the field of ignoring digits out of the identity (“Ignid”). Specifies the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID. Values accepted are between 0 and 19, otherwise the following error message will show: “D: 'Ign' number error. Must be between 0 and 19”;

The number of digits to be inserted is maximum 8. If this value is exceeded it will be signaled as an error: "D: 'Insid' field too big. Maximum number of digits is 8";

The maximum number of digits for the identity (field “Maxid”). The value should be between 0 and 20. The appeared message is: “D: 'Maxid' number error. Must be between 0 and 20.”

TOPEX multiAccess

4.6 “Routing” option The „Routing” option allows you to modify the parameters of the routing table for the TOPEX multiAccess equipment.

In order to configure the routing table you must insert the fields described below:

Prefix – the first digits of numbering, which are needed for routing the call (for example to direct all the calls to a mobile telephony network on a certain route enter the prefix 0722 or 0723 or 0788). If you leave empty this field the respective routing rule will NOT be taken into account at saving action; Inside a prefix string, the value “f” can be used to indicate any digits from zero to nine (0-9). For example, “1f2”

means al prefixes from 102, 112, and so on until 192. This feature is very useful because it allows you to reduce the number of records in the routing table.

Action - specifies the action to be taken for the call. It is a list of six strings: “PORT”, “DIR”, “SERV”, “HUNT”, “DIRIP” and “LCR”. PORT - the call will get out through the port specified in the "Destination" list; DIR - the call will get out by the direction you have specified in the "Destination" list; SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the "Destination" list; HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that you have specified in the "Destination" list; DIRIP - here there are two possibilities:

a) if the version of main application is under "3.29" then the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Destination' list; the "IP" and "Port" fields are taken into account in this situation. This option must be used in case of a VOIP card presence; "Port" filed has meaning just in case when SIP protocol is used. b) if the version of main application is greater or equal than "3.29" then the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Destination' list; the "IP" and "Port" fields are taken into account in this situation. This option must be used in case of a VOIP card presence; "Port" filed has meaning just in case when SIP protocol is used.

LCR - the call will get out by analyzing the LCR table for the index specified in the "Destination" field. This field can take a value from 0 to 6. Each value represents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specified moment.

Destination – the destination, which may be: a port number (in the range 0-127); a direction name specified in “Define directions names” (from the list); a service number (from 0 to 19); a number for a group of hunting (from 0 to 19); an index to the LCR table

Page 143 TOPEX S.A.


Port IP - the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when "DIRIP" is specified in the action field.

Ign – the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the numbering sent out through “Destination”. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;

Ins – option complementary to “Ignore”. Adds to the number sent out through “Destination” the digits specified; the maximum allowed is 16 digits. Ign_Id – the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sent out through “Destination”. There is a list with values from 0 to 20; Ins_id – option complementary to “Ign_Id”. Adds the specified digits to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest', in this example 30; the maximum allowed is 16 digits. IP – used when “DIRIP” is used to fill the “Action” field. It is the remote IP address used to establish voice over IP

connection;

Sign – specify the type of the signaling sent to the destination;

Tax – specify the tax type.

Notes: the value of the field defining the action to be taken ( “Action”). The Allowed values are the names “PORT”,

”DIR”, ”SERV” and respectively “HUNT”. Otherwise it will be signaled as the following error: “R: Wrong field 'type'. Valid values are PORT, DIR, SERV, HUNT.”;

The value of the ignoring field (“Ign”). It specifies the number of digits to be ignored out of the numbering sent to the port specified at “nrport”. This field may take numeric values from 0 up to 20. Otherwise you will get the following error message: “R: 'Ign' number error. Must be between 0 and 20”;

The value of the Caller ID ignoring field (“Ignid”). This specifies the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) out of the Caller ID sent to the port specified by “nrport”. This field may also take only numeric values from 0 up to 20. Otherwise you will get the following error message: “R: 'Ignid' number error. Must be between 0 and 20”.

If during these verifications for the “Edit directions and routing table” a validation error is detected the whole editing window will be colored in red. Also, in the lower part of the window a text will be displayed (also written in red) describing the error and the line on which the error has appeared.

The changes will be transmitted to the TOPEX multiAccess system only after you press the “Apply Changes” button.

If you operate configuration changes but you want to go back to the initial state then you must press the button “Restore Defaults”.

If you perform modifications and you go to another page of configuration without pressing on the “Apply Changes” button these changes will be lost.

4.7 “LCR” option Press the LCR button from the configuration web interface of the TOPEX multiAccess equipment and on the screen will appear the „LCR Table” window where you can insert the details related to the LCR (Least Cost Routing) index.

TOPEX S.A. Page 144

TOPEX multiAccess

Every index contains information related to the selected direction, information related to the time intervals for every week day and for the holidays.

The „LCR Table” window contains the following configurable columns:

Index – insert the LCR index number. It can be defined maximum 8 index labeled from 0 to 7. If you insert another value beside the allowed ones, at the bottom of the window will appear the error message: „Error Index: Please enter a number between 0 and 7” with red font.

Day – press on this field an you can select the week day from the „Select Day” window. The window contains beside the week days, the “Holiday” option which defines the not working days declared as legal holidays. To each day corresponds a mask which will be inserted in the “Day” field . For instance, if you select Monday on the “Day” field will be inserted the digit “1”. Each day have such a mask and also any days combination have such a mask. A possible combination of days is presented in the next table:

Day Mask Possible combinations examples Monday 1 3 Tuesday 3

Page 145 TOPEX S.A.

2 7 Wednesday 4

7 f

Thursday 8 c e

Friday

1f

18 10 Saturday 20 30 70 Sunday 40

7f

f8 f0 e0 e0 c0 Holiday 80 80 80

ff

Start – the start time for the period selected in the “day” field. The format is hh:mm. If you insert a wrong time, at the bottom of the window will appear the error message: „Error Start: Invalid format”;

End – the end time for the respective period in the format hh:mm. If you insert a wrong time, at the bottom of the window will appear the error message: „Error End: Invalid format”;

DirNr – the direction number defined in the „Dirname” menu. In this field you must insert a number between 0 and 19 because for the TOPEX multiAccess equipment can be defined at most 20 directions. If you insert a direction number which is not in this interval you will receive the error message: „Error DirNr: Please enter a number between 0 and 19”.

In order to save the new settings press the „Apply Changes” button, to delete a recording from the LCR table press the „Delete” button and to return to initial settings press „Restore Defaults”.

4.8 “SIM” option Press the “SIM” button in order to access the „SIM Table” window from the equipment configuration web page. The „SIM Table” window contains two different sections labeled „SIM Index” and „Holidays”.


In the „SIM Index” section you will see the 4 index corresponding to the SIM cards (00,01,02,03). Every index contains details about the SIM cards, time intervals and days when the SIM cards are active.

For instance in „Day” field you will see the „ff” value which shows that the SIM cards are active all week including holidays.

This can be verified by clicking the left mouse button on the respective field. On the screen will appear the „Select Day” window where are selected all possible options.

In the „Holiday” section are defined the legal holidays. The section contains two fields „Day” and „Month” where are inserted the proper day and month. If in the „Day” field is not inserted a number between 0 and 31 then will appear the error message „Error Day: Please enter a number between 0 and 31”.

If in the „Month” field is not inserted a number between 0 and 12 then will appear the error message „Error Month: Please enter a number between 0 and 12”.

To save the settings press the „Apply Changes” button. Otherwise press „Restore Defaults”. If you want to delete a SIM index press „Delete SIM” or if you want to delete a recording from the „Holiday” section press „Del Holiday”.

4.9 “Restrictions” option The „Restrictions” options allows the configuration of the restriction classes for calls. The restriction classes are defined in the „Restrictions table” window. The maximum number of restrictions which can be defined is 20 – the „Restr1” ÷ „Restr20” fields.

Each restriction has 8 characters. The characters can be digits or the letters „a”, or „f”. Thus: - 'a' represents the first digit of the phone number. For instance a subscriber with the restriction aa000000 won't be

able to make calls started with digits "00" (international phone calls); - 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restriction f0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to

call any number - it will be able only to receive phone calls< - '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there are eight "0" figures this means that no

restriction has been defined for that field.

A class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a class we have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal value corresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all the restrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will be added the restrictions defined in the current class.

If you insert a restriction that hasnţt 8 characters, on the screen will appear the error message „Error Restr1: Please enter 8 characters”. If one of the 8 characters is a letter which is not „a” or „f”, then the error message will appear on the screen „Error Restr1: Please enter only digit and/or character ‚a’ and ‚f’!”.

If you made configuration modifications but you want to return to the initial settings press the “Restore Defaults” button. If after you modify the restriction classes, you access another configuration page without pressing the “Apply Changes” button, these changes will be lost.

TOPEX S.A. Page 146

TOPEX multiAccess

4.10 “Info GSM” option

Press the „Info GSM” button in order to view the GSM module features. On the screen will appear the „Info GSM table” window which contains details related to the GSM module.

The “Info GSM” option works only when the selected module is not in the initialization state. In the „Info GSM table” window are displayed the following parameters:

GSM_port – the number of the GSM port; Cell_ID – the identification number of the current GSM cell where is registered the SIM card; Signal_Level – the GSM signal level; Channel – the channel used for the communication with the GSM cell.

Press the „Refresh” button in order to see the last values of the GSM parameters. After you press this button, at the bottom of window will appear the message „Refresh completed!”.

4.11 ”Explorer” option The “Explorer” option allows you to navigate through the files and directories structure of the remote equipment.

After authentication (successful log-in) the content of the “/home” directory from the local workstation will be automatically displayed. When you want to enter into a certain sub-directory, you should double click on the respective name from the list and then press the button “Dir”. To get out of a sub-directory you must click the two dots “...” signifying <<directory up>>.

The button “Download” allows you to download from the remote equipment of the file you have chosen. You may specify the destination on the computer where the browser is running but as a default the file will be saved in the same folder and under the same name as it has been saved last time.

When you click “Download” a browser window will pop up, with the name of the file you have chosen, together with a progress bar that shows how the downloading is proceeding. When the download is finished you must close the browser window that has been opened, if you want to repeat the downloading operation.

The option “View” is applied to text configuration files (NOT to binary files) and allows the opening of a viewer window that shows you the content of the file that you want to see.

The “Upload” button allows the uploading to the remote station of a file. When you select this option a window will be displayed, that includes a field named “Where to send” . Here you must enter the destination (the name of the file to which the upload will be performed) It also features a button “Browse” (from the section “What to send”) that allows selecting from the station upon which the browser is running the file that you want to be transmitted.

The uploading operation is started by pressing the “Upload” button. Confirmation of receipt at the remote station is done by means of the message “File upload OK”. If you do not have writing rights for the directory you have chosen for the destination (target) file you will see this error message: “Cannot open to write, maybe you do not have write permission in that directory”.

Earlier we have mentioned that during the time periods of lack of activity the authentication key is automatically deleted.

For security reasons, the uploading of a file is NOT considered as an activity. If during the time required for the file to be uploaded to the server you don’t perform other operations, it may be possible for the key to be invalidated. This invalidation does not prevent the uploading operation to be successfully completed.

4.12 “Logout” option This option allows the user connected to the TOPEX system to get out.

Note: The logout procedure can fail if the lifetime of the user authentication key was exceeded (the key has expired).

In this case an error message will be displayed together with the text “no good key” that warns you that you no longer have a valid key.

Page 147 TOPEX S.A.


TOPEX S.A. Page 148

5 GLOSSARY CAS - Acronym for Channel-Associated Signaling. A type of signaling in which the signals needed to switch a given telephone circuit are transmitted via the voice circuit itself (the same channel that will afterwards be used for the call). Also, the signaling information can be sent through a signaling channel permanently associated with the voice channel.

CCS - Acronym for Common-Channel Signaling. Another type of signaling in which one data channel in each link is dedicated for signaling needed to control, account for, and manage traffic on all the voice or data channels of the link. Unlike CAS, in CCS the transmission of signaling information is performed out of the voice band. The link is a collection of junction channels that have the same properties.

DISA – Acronym for Direct Inward System Access. This function allows an outside caller to directly access a local subscriber by using DTMF codes (for example when you call directly a local subscriber without need for a human operator at the phone exchange).

Directions – groups of phone lines through which the calls are routed, depending upon the routing rules and the numbering that was dialed. In TOPEX equipment, “Directions” are groups of local lines, inbound or outbound trunks that have common routing characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you assign one or more trunks to each direction.

Direction for overflow calls – the direction used as alternative for the “overflow” calls. Overflow calls are calls that get redirected to another direction when the primary direction is not available. This way, no incoming calls are lost, even if the initial direction is busy.

DTMF - Acronym for Dual Tone Multi Frequency, also known as "touch tone". Advanced method for dialing a number, instead of the older Pulse mode. When you press a key on the keypad a combination of two audio frequencies is sent on the line. DTMF capability is important because it allows access to a wide range of interactive voice applications.

DSS1 - Acronym for Digital Subscriber Signaling System No 1. Common channel signaling specific to the connection between PBX and terminal or between two PBX. DSS1 encompasses the entire suite of signaling protocols used across the ISDN Basic Rate and Primary Rate user-network interfaces. It is defined by ITU-T Recommendations Q.920, Q.921, and Q.922 for the suite's data link layer protocol (LAPD) and by ITU-T’s recommendations Q.930, Q.931 and Q.933 for the suite's basic control procedures for calls and access connections. E1 digital trunk – PCM communication system with 30 voice channels and data rate of 2,048kbit/s. E1 is mainly used in Europe. The T1 version (not currently supported by the TOPEX gateway) is used in North America.

Encoding law – compression scheme used in the PCM system, for 64 kbit/s 8kHz encoding of 8-bit PCM audio (voice) data. There are two variants of encoding widely used: A Law (Encoding Law A as per ITU G.711standard) is used as a telephony standard in Europe, Asia, South America, Africa, etc. u-law is a similar encoding commonly used in North America and Japan for digital telephony. The official definition is of these non – linear schemes for compression / decompression of voice signal is the ITU-T standard G.711 (formally CCITT G.711).

G.703 - Electrical specifications for the E1 trunk. Described in the ITU-T Recommendation G.703, "Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces".

G.704 - frame structure specs for the E1 trunk, described by the ITU-T Recommendation G.704, "Synchronous Frame Structures Used at Primary and Secondary Hierarchy Levels".

HDB3 – Acronym for High Density Bipolar 3 Code (ITU-T). A line code used in the E1 digital multiplex trunk. The “3” stands for a maximum of three zeroes.

ISDN - Acronym for Integrated Services Digital Network. ISDN is a worldwide digital network providing high-speed connection between the terminal devices (telephone, fax machines, computers) for a wide range of telecommunication services, using the existing telephony infrastructure. ISDN is based upon two types of communication channels: a B channel that carries data at a rate of 64Kbps and a D channel that carries control information at the rate of 16 or 64Kbps. ISDN also represents an effort to standardize subscriber services, user / network interfaces, and network and internetwork capabilities: the computers and other terminal devices can connect to ISDN through simple, standard interfaces.

ISUP – Acronym for ISDN User Part is the protocol that supports ISDN in the PSTN. It provides the signalling required for circuit-mode bearer services of basic ISDN as well as supplementary services that have end-to-end meaning.

ITU-T - Acronym for International Telecommunication Union Standardization, Section Telecommunications. Since 2001 TOPEX is a sector member of I.T.U.

PCM trunk – digital multiplex of phone channels where analog signal are sampled, digitized and compressed. The telephone channels are separated by time using a new type of transmission method known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM). The compression (encoding) of the analog signal can be performed according to two different encoding laws, A-law or �-law.

MTP – Acronym for Message Transfer Part - is the part of the SS7 used for communication in Public Switched Telephone Network. MTP is responsible for the correct and reliable end-to-end data transport of SS7 messages between communication partners.

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 149 TOPEX S.A.

Q411/412 and Q421/422 – ITU Recommendations for digital line signal codes to be used with the Signaling system R2. ITU Q411/412 is for R2 analog line signaling while Q421/422 is for the digital version. By making use of the increased signaling capacity in PCM systems, simplification of the outgoing and incoming switching equipment can be achieved since the timing conditions necessary for the System R2 line signaling, analogue version, are not required. The digital version of System R2 line signaling uses two signaling channels in each direction of transmission per speech circuit.

QSIG - Acronym for Q-Signaling protocol (by the European Association for Standardizing and Communication Systems). Another common channel signaling protocol, based on ISDN. It enables signaling between nodes (PBX) and is widely deployed for the interoperability of different voice communications platforms and equipment in a multi-vendor environment.

R2 – regional system no. 2 for CAS signaling, used in Romania.

Restriction classes – the classes of restrictions are groups of prefixes that can NOT called through certain external (outgoing) phone lines. For example in order to restrict the access of a local subscriber to international calls he must belong to a class of restrictions for which the 00 prefix is forbidden. Within each class you may define a maximum of 20 restrictions.

RTCP – Acronym for RTP Control Protocol - is used for control and diagnostic on RTP sessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in the IETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintain Quality of Service. RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodically send each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

Signaling – the totality of information exchanges between the phone central and the terminal device or between two phone exchanges. This information is required in order to establish, maintain, and clear switched telephony connections. The signaling can be type CAS or CCS.

SS7 – Signaling System no. 7. Signaling system used for signaling between PBX, in ISDN. In order to be able to establish and disconnect 64 Kbit/s connections with circuit switching, the ISDN phone exchanges must be able to exchange signaling information. The signaling used in ISDN phone centrals is Signaling System No. 7 (SS7) according to CCITT.

System 7 with ISUP – The ISUP (ISDN User Part) software layer provides the interface for applications to establish, maintain and clear telephony connections via the SS7 network, in accordance with the recommendations CCITT Q.761-Q.764 and ANSI T1.113 (from 1988 and respectively 1992). The ISUP layer is also responsible for circuit (group) management, such as blocking, unblocking, and resetting of circuits and circuit groups.


TOPEX S.A. Page 150

6 APPENDIX 1 – AT commands To exit a mobile module from the monitoring state the command "res moni" must be issued.

AT Command Purpose Response

AT Allows the user to check the functionality of the GSM module Should be "OK" in case of success

AT+CPIN? The GSM module is interrogating about pin code. This is a useful method to check if a SIM card is plugged in a GSM module.

- ERROR - there is no SIM installed or there is another error;

- READY - if no PIN code is required; - SIM PIN - the SIM is waiting for PIN

code; - SIM PUK - the SIM is waiting for PUK

code

AT+CREG? This AT command is used to check if the module is registered within the GSM network.

The response is: +CREG:<n>,<stat>,"xxxx", "xxxx" where <stat> can be: - stat = 0 - the module is not registered

and does not try to register to a GSM operator;

- stat = 1 - the module is registered within a GSM network;

- stat = 2 - the module is not registered but is trying to register to a GSM operator;

- stat = 3 - the registration is not allowed; - stat = 4 – unknown; - stat = 5 - the module is registered and

he has roaming. AT+CLIR=<n> where n=0 for default, where n=1 for not sending the identity and n=2 to allow the sending the identity

This command is used to enable or disable the sending of the identity (caller ID)

The module is responding with "OK" with a delay that depends upon the loading of the GSM network. Until the response is waiting an additional AT command must not be sent to the module

AT+CLIR? To check the setting of identity +CLIR:1,4 - the identity is not send +CLIR:2,4 - the identity is send +CLIR:0,4 - default value

AT+CLIP=<n> where n=0 for not displaying the identity of the calling part and n=1 to allow displaying of the calling part identity

To display or to not display the identity of the calling part in case of a call through the monitored GSM port

The module is responding with "OK"

ATD<number>; Where <number> is the number to be dialed

This is an useful method to make a call test directly from the GSM module

The response can be: OK - the destination part has answered NO CARRIER - the destination part does not respond or it is not in the covered area BUSY - the destination part is busy

ATA

Is used for responding to an incoming call. When incoming call is routed through a GSM module which is in monitoring state, the "RING" word will appear at each 5 seconds. If CLIP is activated then a message with the calling number will be displayed: +CLIP: "calling number" ,xxx

The GSM module is responding with "OK"

ATH The command is used to end a call The GSM module is responding with "OK"

AT+COPS=? This command will detect and display all active GSM operators in the gateway area

AT+COPS? This command will display the operator's name to which the GSM module has registered

TOPEX multiAccess

Page 151 TOPEX S.A.

First Command:

- AT+CMGF=<n> where <n> is 1 for text format and 0 for PDU format. The value to be used is 1.

- The module will respond with "OK".

- AT+CMGS="number" This command is used to complete the destination phone number.

- The module will respond with ">". Sending a SMS

- The command which will send the SMS messages is:

@send <text message>

- The response for confirmation is: +CMGS: <message reference> OK

- The response for error is: +CMS ERROR: <error>

AT+SIM=<n>,n=0,1,2,3

(Note: here the values for identifying the SIM card are from 0 to 3 (instead of 1 to 4))

This is an useful method to check if the GSM module is working properly: the command is used to set a new active SIM (this is not a AT command: it is a command interpreted by the controller of the GSM card) These settings are made directly with the GSM module.

The confirmation response is "OKSIMn" where "n" is 0,1,2 or 3 if that SIM was selected


TOPEX S.A. Page 152

The manufacturer reserves the right to modify the product and manual for the purpose of technical

improvement without prior notice. The manufacturer guarantees the good functioning of the product provided that it has

been correctly installed and the directives for storage and usage have been respected. The warranty implies exclusively

repairing or replacing the defective unit. The warranty does not include any indirect losses or loss of profit. The

manufacturer is not liable for any damage, whether direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential, as a result of

using the TOPEX multiAccess equipment.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the company TOPEX S.A

It is certified hereby that the multiAccess unit is manufactured in accordance with the legal provisions

concerning responsibility towards the quality of delivered products, fulfills the quality parameters specified in its “User’s

Manual” and is fit for the purpose for which it has been designed. It also warrants that the equipment will perform

substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation.

Any comments, suggestions and proposals of yours concerning our products are welcome and we are gladly

waiting for your feedback.

TOPEX S.A. Feleacu no. 10, sector 1

Bucharest 014186, ROMANIA

Tel: + 4 021.408.39.00 Fax: + 4 021.408.39.09

e-mail: [email protected]

web: www.topex.ro

http://www.topex.ro/

Documents

Gwconfig Oam En